blob: cd8acceaafde837aa741b62f6a71460abc32fbd3 [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001/* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
2 *
3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar
4 *
5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
8 */
9
10/*
11 * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
12 */
13
14#include "vim.h"
15#include "version.h"
16
17#ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H
18# include <fcntl.h> /* for chdir() */
19#endif
20
21static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
22static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
23#if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
24static char_u *remove_tail_with_ext __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *ext));
25#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000026static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u *src));
27
28/*
29 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
30 */
31 int
32get_indent()
33{
34 return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
35}
36
37/*
38 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
39 */
40 int
41get_indent_lnum(lnum)
42 linenr_T lnum;
43{
44 return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
45}
46
47#if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
48/*
49 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
50 * "buf".
51 */
52 int
53get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
54 buf_T *buf;
55 linenr_T lnum;
56{
57 return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
58}
59#endif
60
61/*
62 * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
63 * 'tabstop' at "ts"
64 */
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +000065 int
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000066get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
67 char_u *ptr;
68 int ts;
69{
70 int count = 0;
71
72 for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
73 {
74 if (*ptr == TAB) /* count a tab for what it is worth */
75 count += ts - (count % ts);
76 else if (*ptr == ' ')
77 ++count; /* count a space for one */
78 else
79 break;
80 }
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +000081 return count;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000082}
83
84/*
85 * Set the indent of the current line.
86 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
87 * Caller must take care of undo.
88 * "flags":
89 * SIN_CHANGED: call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
90 * SIN_INSERT: insert the indent in front of the line.
91 * SIN_UNDO: save line for undo before changing it.
92 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
93 */
94 int
95set_indent(size, flags)
96 int size;
97 int flags;
98{
99 char_u *p;
100 char_u *newline;
101 char_u *oldline;
102 char_u *s;
103 int todo;
104 int ind_len;
105 int line_len;
106 int doit = FALSE;
107 int ind_done;
108 int tab_pad;
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000109 int retval = FALSE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000110
111 /*
112 * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
113 * characters needed for the indent.
114 */
115 todo = size;
116 ind_len = 0;
117 p = oldline = ml_get_curline();
118
119 /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
120 * isn't already set */
121
122 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
123 if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
124 {
125 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
126 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
127 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
128 {
129 ind_done = 0;
130
131 /* count as many characters as we can use */
132 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
133 {
134 if (*p == TAB)
135 {
136 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
137 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
138 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
139 if (todo < tab_pad)
140 break;
141 todo -= tab_pad;
142 ++ind_len;
143 ind_done += tab_pad;
144 }
145 else
146 {
147 --todo;
148 ++ind_len;
149 ++ind_done;
150 }
151 ++p;
152 }
153
154 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
155 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
156 if (todo >= tab_pad)
157 {
158 doit = TRUE;
159 todo -= tab_pad;
160 ++ind_len;
161 /* ind_done += tab_pad; */
162 }
163 }
164
165 /* count tabs required for indent */
166 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
167 {
168 if (*p != TAB)
169 doit = TRUE;
170 else
171 ++p;
172 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
173 ++ind_len;
174 /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
175 }
176 }
177 /* count spaces required for indent */
178 while (todo > 0)
179 {
180 if (*p != ' ')
181 doit = TRUE;
182 else
183 ++p;
184 --todo;
185 ++ind_len;
186 /* ++ind_done; */
187 }
188
189 /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
190 if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
191 return FALSE;
192
193 /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
194 if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
195 p = oldline;
196 else
197 p = skipwhite(p);
198 line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;
199 newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
200 if (newline == NULL)
201 return FALSE;
202
203 /* Put the characters in the new line. */
204 s = newline;
205 todo = size;
206 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
207 if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
208 {
209 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
210 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
211 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
212 {
213 p = oldline;
214 ind_done = 0;
215
216 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
217 {
218 if (*p == TAB)
219 {
220 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
221 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
222 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
223 if (todo < tab_pad)
224 break;
225 todo -= tab_pad;
226 ind_done += tab_pad;
227 }
228 else
229 {
230 --todo;
231 ++ind_done;
232 }
233 *s++ = *p++;
234 }
235
236 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
237 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
238 if (todo >= tab_pad)
239 {
240 *s++ = TAB;
241 todo -= tab_pad;
242 }
243
244 p = skipwhite(p);
245 }
246
247 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
248 {
249 *s++ = TAB;
250 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
251 }
252 }
253 while (todo > 0)
254 {
255 *s++ = ' ';
256 --todo;
257 }
258 mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);
259
260 /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
261 if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
262 {
263 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
264 if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
265 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
266 /* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
267 if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
268 && saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
269 saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (p - oldline);
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000270 retval = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000271 }
272 else
273 vim_free(newline);
274
275 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000276 return retval;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000277}
278
279/*
280 * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
281 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
282 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
283 */
284 static int
285copy_indent(size, src)
286 int size;
287 char_u *src;
288{
289 char_u *p = NULL;
290 char_u *line = NULL;
291 char_u *s;
292 int todo;
293 int ind_len;
294 int line_len = 0;
295 int tab_pad;
296 int ind_done;
297 int round;
298
299 /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
300 * Round 2: copy the characters. */
301 for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
302 {
303 todo = size;
304 ind_len = 0;
305 ind_done = 0;
306 s = src;
307
308 /* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
309 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
310 {
311 if (*s == TAB)
312 {
313 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
314 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
315 /* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
316 if (todo < tab_pad)
317 break;
318 todo -= tab_pad;
319 ind_done += tab_pad;
320 }
321 else
322 {
323 --todo;
324 ++ind_done;
325 }
326 ++ind_len;
327 if (round == 2)
328 *p++ = *s;
329 ++s;
330 }
331
332 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
333 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
334 if (todo >= tab_pad)
335 {
336 todo -= tab_pad;
337 ++ind_len;
338 if (round == 2)
339 *p++ = TAB;
340 }
341
342 /* Add tabs required for indent */
343 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
344 {
345 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
346 ++ind_len;
347 if (round == 2)
348 *p++ = TAB;
349 }
350
351 /* Count/add spaces required for indent */
352 while (todo > 0)
353 {
354 --todo;
355 ++ind_len;
356 if (round == 2)
357 *p++ = ' ';
358 }
359
360 if (round == 1)
361 {
362 /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
363 * and the rest of the line. */
364 line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
365 line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
366 if (line == NULL)
367 return FALSE;
368 p = line;
369 }
370 }
371
372 /* Append the original line */
373 mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);
374
375 /* Replace the line */
376 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);
377
378 /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
379 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
380 return TRUE;
381}
382
383/*
384 * Return the indent of the current line after a number. Return -1 if no
385 * number was found. Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000386 * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000387 */
388 int
389get_number_indent(lnum)
390 linenr_T lnum;
391{
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000392 colnr_T col;
393 pos_T pos;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000394 regmmatch_T regmatch;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000395
396 if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
397 return -1;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000398 pos.lnum = 0;
399 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC);
400 if (regmatch.regprog != NULL)
401 {
402 regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE;
Bram Moolenaar3b56eb32005-07-11 22:40:32 +0000403 regmatch.rmm_maxcol = 0;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000404 if (vim_regexec_multi(&regmatch, curwin, curbuf, lnum, (colnr_T)0))
405 {
406 pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum;
407 pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col;
408#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
409 pos.coladd = 0;
410#endif
411 }
412 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
413 }
414
415 if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000416 return -1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000417 getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
418 return (int)col;
419}
420
421#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)
422
423static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));
424
425/*
426 * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
427 */
428 static int
429cin_is_cinword(line)
430 char_u *line;
431{
432 char_u *cinw;
433 char_u *cinw_buf;
434 int cinw_len;
435 int retval = FALSE;
436 int len;
437
438 cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
439 cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
440 if (cinw_buf != NULL)
441 {
442 line = skipwhite(line);
443 for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
444 {
445 len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
446 if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
447 && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
448 {
449 retval = TRUE;
450 break;
451 }
452 }
453 vim_free(cinw_buf);
454 }
455 return retval;
456}
457#endif
458
459/*
460 * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
461 *
462 * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
463 * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
464 *
465 * Caller must take care of undo. Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
466 * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
467 * new line.
468 * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES delete spaces after cursor
469 * OPENLINE_DO_COM format comments
470 * OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL keep trailing spaces
471 * OPENLINE_MARKFIX adjust mark positions after the line break
472 *
473 * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
474 */
475 int
476open_line(dir, flags, old_indent)
477 int dir; /* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
478 int flags;
479 int old_indent; /* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */
480{
481 char_u *saved_line; /* copy of the original line */
482 char_u *next_line = NULL; /* copy of the next line */
483 char_u *p_extra = NULL; /* what goes to next line */
484 int less_cols = 0; /* less columns for mark in new line */
485 int less_cols_off = 0; /* columns to skip for mark adjust */
486 pos_T old_cursor; /* old cursor position */
487 int newcol = 0; /* new cursor column */
488 int newindent = 0; /* auto-indent of the new line */
489 int n;
490 int trunc_line = FALSE; /* truncate current line afterwards */
491 int retval = FALSE; /* return value, default is FAIL */
492#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
493 int extra_len = 0; /* length of p_extra string */
494 int lead_len; /* length of comment leader */
495 char_u *lead_flags; /* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
496 char_u *leader = NULL; /* copy of comment leader */
497#endif
498 char_u *allocated = NULL; /* allocated memory */
499#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
500 || defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
501 char_u *p;
502#endif
503 int saved_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */
504#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
505 pos_T *pos;
506#endif
507#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
508 int do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
509# ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
510 && !curbuf->b_p_cin
511# endif
512 );
513 int no_si = FALSE; /* reset did_si afterwards */
514 int first_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */
515#endif
516#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
517 int vreplace_mode;
518#endif
519 int did_append; /* appended a new line */
520 int saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */
521
522 /*
523 * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
524 */
525 saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
526 if (saved_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */
527 return FALSE;
528
529#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
530 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
531 {
532 /*
533 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
534 * starting to replace. First make the new line empty and let vim play
535 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content. Then
536 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
537 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
538 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
539 * stuff onto the replace stack. -- webb.
540 */
541 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
542 next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
543 else
544 next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
545 if (next_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */
546 goto theend;
547
548 /*
549 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
550 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
551 * line onto the replace stack. We'll push any other characters that
552 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
553 * etc) a bit later.
554 */
555 replace_push(NUL); /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
556 replace_push(NUL);
557 p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
558 while (*p != NUL)
559 replace_push(*p++);
560 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
561 }
562#endif
563
564 if ((State & INSERT)
565#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
566 && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
567#endif
568 )
569 {
570 p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
571#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
572 if (do_si) /* need first char after new line break */
573 {
574 p = skipwhite(p_extra);
575 first_char = *p;
576 }
577#endif
578#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
579 extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
580#endif
581 saved_char = *p_extra;
582 *p_extra = NUL;
583 }
584
585 u_clearline(); /* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
586#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
587 did_si = FALSE;
588#endif
589 ai_col = 0;
590
591 /*
592 * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
593 * the prior line, and it should be truncated. Do this even if 'ai' is not
594 * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
595 */
596 if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
597 trunc_line = TRUE;
598
599 /*
600 * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
601 * indent to use for the new line.
602 */
603 if (curbuf->b_p_ai
604#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
605 || do_si
606#endif
607 )
608 {
609 /*
610 * count white space on current line
611 */
612 newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
613 if (newindent == 0)
614 newindent = old_indent; /* for ^^D command in insert mode */
615
616#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
617 /*
618 * Do smart indenting.
619 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
620 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
621 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
622 * "if (condition) {"
623 */
624 if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
625 && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
626 {
627 char_u *ptr;
628 char_u last_char;
629
630 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
631 ptr = saved_line;
632# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
633 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
634 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
635 else
636 lead_len = 0;
637# endif
638 if (dir == FORWARD)
639 {
640 /*
641 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
642 * recognised as comments.
643 */
644 if (
645# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
646 lead_len == 0 &&
647# endif
648 ptr[0] == '#')
649 {
650 while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
651 ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
652 newindent = get_indent();
653 }
654# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
655 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
656 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
657 else
658 lead_len = 0;
659 if (lead_len > 0)
660 {
661 /*
662 * This case gets the following right:
663 * \*
664 * * A comment (read '\' as '/').
665 * *\
666 * #define IN_THE_WAY
667 * This should line up here;
668 */
669 p = skipwhite(ptr);
670 if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
671 p++;
672 if (p[0] == '*')
673 {
674 for (p++; *p; p++)
675 {
676 if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
677 {
678 /*
679 * End of C comment, indent should line up
680 * with the line containing the start of
681 * the comment
682 */
683 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
684 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
685 {
686 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
687 newindent = get_indent();
688 }
689 }
690 }
691 }
692 }
693 else /* Not a comment line */
694# endif
695 {
696 /* Find last non-blank in line */
697 p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
698 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
699 --p;
700 last_char = *p;
701
702 /*
703 * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
704 */
705 if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
706 {
707 if (p > ptr)
708 --p;
709 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
710 --p;
711 }
712 /*
713 * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
714 * lines. eg:
715 * if (condition &&
716 * condition) {
717 * Should line up here!
718 * }
719 */
720 if (*p == ')')
721 {
722 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
723 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
724 {
725 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
726 newindent = get_indent();
727 ptr = ml_get_curline();
728 }
729 }
730 /*
731 * If last character is '{' do indent, without
732 * checking for "if" and the like.
733 */
734 if (last_char == '{')
735 {
736 did_si = TRUE; /* do indent */
737 no_si = TRUE; /* don't delete it when '{' typed */
738 }
739 /*
740 * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
741 * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
742 * '}'.
743 */
744 else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
745 && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
746 did_si = TRUE;
747 }
748 }
749 else /* dir == BACKWARD */
750 {
751 /*
752 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
753 * recognised as comments.
754 */
755 if (
756# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
757 lead_len == 0 &&
758# endif
759 ptr[0] == '#')
760 {
761 int was_backslashed = FALSE;
762
763 while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
764 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
765 {
766 if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
767 was_backslashed = TRUE;
768 else
769 was_backslashed = FALSE;
770 ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
771 }
772 if (was_backslashed)
773 newindent = 0; /* Got to end of file */
774 else
775 newindent = get_indent();
776 }
777 p = skipwhite(ptr);
778 if (*p == '}') /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
779 did_si = TRUE;
780 else /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
781 can_si_back = TRUE;
782 }
783 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
784 }
785 if (do_si)
786 can_si = TRUE;
787#endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */
788
789 did_ai = TRUE;
790 }
791
792#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
793 /*
794 * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
795 * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
796 */
797 end_comment_pending = NUL;
798 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
799 lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD);
800 else
801 lead_len = 0;
802 if (lead_len > 0)
803 {
804 char_u *lead_repl = NULL; /* replaces comment leader */
805 int lead_repl_len = 0; /* length of *lead_repl */
806 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */
807 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */
808 char_u *comment_end = NULL; /* where lead_end has been found */
809 int extra_space = FALSE; /* append extra space */
810 int current_flag;
811 int require_blank = FALSE; /* requires blank after middle */
812 char_u *p2;
813
814 /*
815 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
816 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
817 */
818 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
819 {
820 if (*p == COM_BLANK)
821 {
822 require_blank = TRUE;
823 continue;
824 }
825 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
826 {
827 current_flag = *p;
828 if (*p == COM_START)
829 {
830 /*
831 * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
832 */
833 if (dir == BACKWARD)
834 {
835 lead_len = 0;
836 break;
837 }
838
839 /* find start of middle part */
840 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
841 require_blank = FALSE;
842 }
843
844 /*
845 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
846 */
847 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of middle flags */
848 {
849 if (*p == COM_BLANK)
850 require_blank = TRUE;
851 ++p;
852 }
853 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
854
855 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of end flags */
856 {
857 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
858 if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
859 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
860 ++p;
861 }
862 n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
863
864 if (end_comment_pending == -1) /* we can set it now */
865 end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];
866
867 /*
868 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
869 * the comment leader.
870 */
871 if (dir == FORWARD)
872 {
873 for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
874 if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
875 {
876 comment_end = p;
877 lead_len = 0;
878 break;
879 }
880 }
881
882 /*
883 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
884 */
885 if (lead_len > 0)
886 {
887 if (current_flag == COM_START)
888 {
889 lead_repl = lead_middle;
890 lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
891 }
892
893 /*
894 * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
895 * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
896 * comment leader on the next line.
897 */
898 if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
899 && ((p_extra != NULL
900 && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
901 || (p_extra == NULL
902 && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
903 || require_blank))
904 extra_space = TRUE;
905 }
906 break;
907 }
908 if (*p == COM_END)
909 {
910 /*
911 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
912 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
913 * start (for C-comments).
914 */
915 if (dir == FORWARD)
916 {
917 comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
918 lead_len = 0;
919 break;
920 }
921
922 /*
923 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
924 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
925 */
926 while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
927 --p;
928 for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
929 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
930 ;
931 lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);
932
933 /* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
934 * the comment-end */
935 extra_space = TRUE;
936
937 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
938 for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
939 {
940 if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
941 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
942 }
943 if (end_comment_pending == -1)
944 {
945 /* Find last character in end-comment string */
946 while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
947 p2++;
948 end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
949 }
950 break;
951 }
952 if (*p == COM_FIRST)
953 {
954 /*
955 * Comment leader for first line only: Don't repeat leader
956 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
957 */
958 if (dir == BACKWARD)
959 lead_len = 0;
960 else
961 {
962 lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
963 lead_repl_len = 0;
964 }
965 break;
966 }
967 }
968 if (lead_len)
969 {
970 /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */
971 leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space +
972 extra_len + 1);
973 allocated = leader; /* remember to free it later */
974
975 if (leader == NULL)
976 lead_len = 0;
977 else
978 {
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000979 vim_strncpy(leader, saved_line, lead_len);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000980
981 /*
982 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
983 */
984 if (lead_repl != NULL)
985 {
986 int c = 0;
987 int off = 0;
988
989 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
990 {
991 if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
992 c = *p;
993 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
994 off = getdigits(&p);
995 }
996 if (c == COM_RIGHT) /* right adjusted leader */
997 {
998 /* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
999 for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
1000 && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
1001 ;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001002 ++p;
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001003
1004#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1005 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1006 * screen characters, not bytes. */
1007 {
1008 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1009 lead_repl_len);
1010 int old_size = 0;
1011 char_u *endp = p;
1012 int l;
1013
1014 while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader)
1015 {
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001016 mb_ptr_back(leader, p);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001017 old_size += ptr2cells(p);
1018 }
1019 l = lead_repl_len - (endp - p);
1020 if (l != 0)
1021 mch_memmove(endp + l, endp,
1022 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp));
1023 lead_len += l;
1024 }
1025#else
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001026 if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
1027 p = leader;
1028 else
1029 p -= lead_repl_len;
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001030#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001031 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1032 if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
1033 p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;
1034
1035 /* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
1036 while (--p >= leader)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001037 {
1038#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1039 int l = mb_head_off(leader, p);
1040
1041 if (l > 1)
1042 {
1043 p -= l;
1044 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1045 {
1046 p[1] = ' ';
1047 --l;
1048 }
1049 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1,
1050 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1)));
1051 lead_len -= l;
1052 *p = ' ';
1053 }
1054 else
1055#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001056 if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1057 *p = ' ';
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001058 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001059 }
1060 else /* left adjusted leader */
1061 {
1062 p = skipwhite(leader);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001063#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1064 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1065 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is
1066 * not to be overwritten. */
1067 {
1068 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1069 lead_repl_len);
1070 int i;
1071 int l;
1072
1073 for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l)
1074 {
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00001075 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001076 if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size)
1077 break;
1078 }
1079 if (i != lead_repl_len)
1080 {
1081 mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i,
1082 (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p)));
1083 lead_len += lead_repl_len - i;
1084 }
1085 }
1086#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001087 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1088
1089 /* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
1090 * leader by spaces. Keep Tabs, the indent must
1091 * remain the same. */
1092 for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
1093 if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1094 {
1095 /* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
1096 if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
1097 {
1098 --lead_len;
1099 mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
1100 (leader + lead_len) - p);
1101 }
1102 else
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001103 {
1104#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00001105 int l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001106
1107 if (l > 1)
1108 {
1109 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1110 {
1111 /* Replace a double-wide char with
1112 * two spaces */
1113 --l;
1114 *p++ = ' ';
1115 }
1116 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l,
1117 (leader + lead_len) - p);
1118 lead_len -= l - 1;
1119 }
1120#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001121 *p = ' ';
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001122 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001123 }
1124 *p = NUL;
1125 }
1126
1127 /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
1128 if (curbuf->b_p_ai
1129#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1130 || do_si
1131#endif
1132 )
1133 newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
1134
1135 /* Add the indent offset */
1136 if (newindent + off < 0)
1137 {
1138 off = -newindent;
1139 newindent = 0;
1140 }
1141 else
1142 newindent += off;
1143
1144 /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
1145 * alignment remains equal. */
1146 while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
1147 && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
1148 {
1149 /* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
1150 if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
1151 break;
1152 --lead_len;
1153 --off;
1154 }
1155
1156 /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
1157 * extra space */
1158 if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
1159 extra_space = FALSE;
1160 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1161 }
1162
1163 if (extra_space)
1164 {
1165 leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
1166 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1167 }
1168
1169 newcol = lead_len;
1170
1171 /*
1172 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
1173 * is in the comment leader
1174 */
1175 if (newindent
1176#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1177 || did_si
1178#endif
1179 )
1180 {
1181 while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
1182 {
1183 --lead_len;
1184 --newcol;
1185 ++leader;
1186 }
1187 }
1188
1189 }
1190#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1191 did_si = can_si = FALSE;
1192#endif
1193 }
1194 else if (comment_end != NULL)
1195 {
1196 /*
1197 * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
1198 * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
1199 * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
1200 * comment.
1201 */
1202 if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
1203 (curbuf->b_p_ai
1204#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1205 || do_si
1206#endif
1207 ))
1208 {
1209 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1210 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
1211 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
1212 {
1213 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
1214 newindent = get_indent();
1215 }
1216 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1217 }
1218 }
1219 }
1220#endif
1221
1222 /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
1223 if (p_extra != NULL)
1224 {
1225 *p_extra = saved_char; /* restore char that NUL replaced */
1226
1227 /*
1228 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
1229 * non-blank.
1230 *
1231 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
1232 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
1233 */
1234 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1235 replace_push(NUL); /* end of extra blanks */
1236 if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
1237 {
1238 while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
1239#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1240 && (!enc_utf8
1241 || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
1242#endif
1243 )
1244 {
1245 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1246 replace_push(*p_extra);
1247 ++p_extra;
1248 ++less_cols_off;
1249 }
1250 }
1251 if (*p_extra != NUL)
1252 did_ai = FALSE; /* append some text, don't truncate now */
1253
1254 /* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
1255 less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
1256 }
1257
1258 if (p_extra == NULL)
1259 p_extra = (char_u *)""; /* append empty line */
1260
1261#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1262 /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
1263 if (lead_len)
1264 {
1265 STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
1266 p_extra = leader;
1267 did_ai = TRUE; /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
1268 less_cols -= lead_len;
1269 }
1270 else
1271 end_comment_pending = NUL; /* turns out there was no leader */
1272#endif
1273
1274 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1275 if (dir == BACKWARD)
1276 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1277#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1278 if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
1279#endif
1280 {
1281 if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
1282 == FAIL)
1283 goto theend;
1284 /* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
1285 * with markers. */
1286 mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
1287 did_append = TRUE;
1288 }
1289#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1290 else
1291 {
1292 /*
1293 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
1294 */
1295 curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
1296 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
1297 {
1298 /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
1299 * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
1300 */
1301 (void)u_save_cursor(); /* errors are ignored! */
1302 vr_lines_changed++;
1303 }
1304 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
1305 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
1306 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
1307 did_append = FALSE;
1308 }
1309#endif
1310
1311 if (newindent
1312#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1313 || did_si
1314#endif
1315 )
1316 {
1317 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1318#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1319 if (did_si)
1320 {
1321 if (p_sr)
1322 newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1323 newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1324 }
1325#endif
1326 /* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */
1327 if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et)
1328 {
1329 (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);
1330
1331 /*
1332 * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
1333 * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
1334 * it. It gets restored at the function end.
1335 */
1336 curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
1337 }
1338 else
1339 (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
1340 less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;
1341
1342 ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1343
1344 /*
1345 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
1346 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
1347 */
1348 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1349 for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
1350 replace_push(NUL);
1351 newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
1352#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1353 if (no_si)
1354 did_si = FALSE;
1355#endif
1356 }
1357
1358#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1359 /*
1360 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
1361 * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
1362 */
1363 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1364 while (lead_len-- > 0)
1365 replace_push(NUL);
1366#endif
1367
1368 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1369
1370 if (dir == FORWARD)
1371 {
1372 if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
1373 {
1374 /* truncate current line at cursor */
1375 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
1376 /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
1377 if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
1378 truncate_spaces(saved_line);
1379 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
1380 saved_line = NULL;
1381 if (did_append)
1382 {
1383 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
1384 curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
1385 did_append = FALSE;
1386
1387 /* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
1388 if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
1389 mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
1390 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
1391 1L, (long)-less_cols);
1392 }
1393 else
1394 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
1395 }
1396
1397 /*
1398 * Put the cursor on the new line. Careful: the scrollup() above may
1399 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
1400 */
1401 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
1402 }
1403 if (did_append)
1404 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);
1405
1406 curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
1407#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1408 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1409#endif
1410
1411#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1412 /*
1413 * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
1414 * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
1415 * normal INSERT mode.
1416 */
1417 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1418 {
1419 vreplace_mode = State; /* So we know to put things right later */
1420 State = INSERT;
1421 }
1422 else
1423 vreplace_mode = 0;
1424#endif
1425#ifdef FEAT_LISP
1426 /*
1427 * May do lisp indenting.
1428 */
1429 if (!p_paste
1430# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1431 && leader == NULL
1432# endif
1433 && curbuf->b_p_lisp
1434 && curbuf->b_p_ai)
1435 {
1436 fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
1437 p = ml_get_curline();
1438 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1439 }
1440#endif
1441#ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
1442 /*
1443 * May do indenting after opening a new line.
1444 */
1445 if (!p_paste
1446 && (curbuf->b_p_cin
1447# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
1448 || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
1449# endif
1450 )
1451 && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
1452 ? KEY_OPEN_FORW
1453 : KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
1454 {
1455 do_c_expr_indent();
1456 p = ml_get_curline();
1457 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1458 }
1459#endif
1460#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1461 if (vreplace_mode != 0)
1462 State = vreplace_mode;
1463#endif
1464
1465#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1466 /*
1467 * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
1468 * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
1469 * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
1470 */
1471 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1472 {
1473 /* Put new line in p_extra */
1474 p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
1475 if (p_extra == NULL)
1476 goto theend;
1477
1478 /* Put back original line */
1479 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);
1480
1481 /* Insert new stuff into line again */
1482 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
1483#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1484 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1485#endif
1486 ins_bytes(p_extra); /* will call changed_bytes() */
1487 vim_free(p_extra);
1488 next_line = NULL;
1489 }
1490#endif
1491
1492 retval = TRUE; /* success! */
1493theend:
1494 curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
1495 vim_free(saved_line);
1496 vim_free(next_line);
1497 vim_free(allocated);
1498 return retval;
1499}
1500
1501#if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
1502/*
1503 * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
1504 * which introduces a comment. If this string is not a comment then 0 is
1505 * returned.
1506 * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
1507 * comment leader.
1508 * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
1509 */
1510 int
1511get_leader_len(line, flags, backward)
1512 char_u *line;
1513 char_u **flags;
1514 int backward;
1515{
1516 int i, j;
1517 int got_com = FALSE;
1518 int found_one;
1519 char_u part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* buffer for one option part */
1520 char_u *string; /* pointer to comment string */
1521 char_u *list;
1522
1523 i = 0;
1524 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) /* leading white space is ignored */
1525 ++i;
1526
1527 /*
1528 * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
1529 */
1530 while (line[i])
1531 {
1532 /*
1533 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
1534 */
1535 found_one = FALSE;
1536 for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
1537 {
1538 /*
1539 * Get one option part into part_buf[]. Advance list to next one.
1540 * put string at start of string.
1541 */
1542 if (!got_com && flags != NULL) /* remember where flags started */
1543 *flags = list;
1544 (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
1545 string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
1546 if (string == NULL) /* missing ':', ignore this part */
1547 continue;
1548 *string++ = NUL; /* isolate flags from string */
1549
1550 /*
1551 * When already found a nested comment, only accept further
1552 * nested comments.
1553 */
1554 if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1555 continue;
1556
1557 /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */
1558 if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
1559 continue;
1560
1561 /*
1562 * Line contents and string must match.
1563 * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
1564 * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
1565 * TABs and spaces).
1566 */
1567 if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1568 {
1569 if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
1570 continue;
1571 while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1572 ++string;
1573 }
1574 for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
1575 ;
1576 if (string[j] != NUL)
1577 continue;
1578
1579 /*
1580 * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
1581 * end-of-line after the string in the line.
1582 */
1583 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
1584 && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
1585 continue;
1586
1587 /*
1588 * We have found a match, stop searching.
1589 */
1590 i += j;
1591 got_com = TRUE;
1592 found_one = TRUE;
1593 break;
1594 }
1595
1596 /*
1597 * No match found, stop scanning.
1598 */
1599 if (!found_one)
1600 break;
1601
1602 /*
1603 * Include any trailing white space.
1604 */
1605 while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
1606 ++i;
1607
1608 /*
1609 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here.
1610 */
1611 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1612 break;
1613 }
1614 return (got_com ? i : 0);
1615}
1616#endif
1617
1618/*
1619 * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
1620 */
1621 int
1622plines(lnum)
1623 linenr_T lnum;
1624{
1625 return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1626}
1627
1628 int
1629plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
1630 win_T *wp;
1631 linenr_T lnum;
1632 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */
1633{
1634#if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
1635 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result
1636 * is one line anyway. */
1637 return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1638}
1639
1640 int
1641plines_nofill(lnum)
1642 linenr_T lnum;
1643{
1644 return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1645}
1646
1647 int
1648plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
1649 win_T *wp;
1650 linenr_T lnum;
1651 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */
1652{
1653#endif
1654 int lines;
1655
1656 if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1657 return 1;
1658
1659#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1660 if (wp->w_width == 0)
1661 return 1;
1662#endif
1663
1664#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1665 /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
1666 /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
1667 if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
1668 return 1;
1669#endif
1670
1671 lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
1672 if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
1673 return (int)wp->w_height;
1674 return lines;
1675}
1676
1677/*
1678 * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
1679 * "wp". Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
1680 */
1681 int
1682plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
1683 win_T *wp;
1684 linenr_T lnum;
1685{
1686 char_u *s;
1687 long col;
1688 int width;
1689
1690 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1691 if (*s == NUL) /* empty line */
1692 return 1;
1693 col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);
1694
1695 /*
1696 * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
1697 * extra column.
1698 */
1699 if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
1700 col += 1;
1701
1702 /*
1703 * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'.
1704 */
1705 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1706 if (width <= 0)
1707 return 32000;
1708 if (col <= width)
1709 return 1;
1710 col -= width;
1711 width += win_col_off2(wp);
1712 return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
1713}
1714
1715/*
1716 * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
1717 * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
1718 */
1719 int
1720plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
1721 win_T *wp;
1722 linenr_T lnum;
1723 long column;
1724{
1725 long col;
1726 char_u *s;
1727 int lines = 0;
1728 int width;
1729
1730#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1731 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result
1732 * is one line anyway. */
1733 lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1734#endif
1735
1736 if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1737 return lines + 1;
1738
1739#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1740 if (wp->w_width == 0)
1741 return lines + 1;
1742#endif
1743
1744 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1745
1746 col = 0;
1747 while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
1748 {
1749 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001750 mb_ptr_adv(s);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001751 }
1752
1753 /*
1754 * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
1755 * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
1756 * screen position of the TAB. This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
1757 * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
1758 * 'ts') -- webb.
1759 */
1760 if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
1761 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;
1762
1763 /*
1764 * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc.
1765 */
1766 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1767 if (width > 0)
1768 {
1769 lines += 1;
1770 if (col >= width)
1771 lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp));
1772 if (lines <= wp->w_height)
1773 return lines;
1774 }
1775 return (int)(wp->w_height); /* maximum length */
1776}
1777
1778 int
1779plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
1780 win_T *wp;
1781 linenr_T first, last;
1782{
1783 int count = 0;
1784
1785 while (first <= last)
1786 {
1787#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1788 int x;
1789
1790 /* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
1791 * that are maybe folded. */
1792 x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
1793 if (x > 0)
1794 {
1795 ++count; /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
1796 first += x;
1797 }
1798 else
1799#endif
1800 {
1801#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1802 if (first == wp->w_topline)
1803 count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
1804 else
1805#endif
1806 count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
1807 ++first;
1808 }
1809 }
1810 return (count);
1811}
1812
1813#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
1814/*
1815 * Insert string "p" at the cursor position. Stops at a NUL byte.
1816 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1817 */
1818 void
1819ins_bytes(p)
1820 char_u *p;
1821{
1822 ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
1823}
1824#endif
1825
1826#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
1827 || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1828/*
1829 * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
1830 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1831 */
1832 void
1833ins_bytes_len(p, len)
1834 char_u *p;
1835 int len;
1836{
1837 int i;
1838# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1839 int n;
1840
1841 for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
1842 {
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00001843 n = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001844 ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
1845 }
1846# else
1847 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
1848 ins_char(p[i]);
1849# endif
1850}
1851#endif
1852
1853/*
1854 * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
1855 * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
1856 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1857 * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
1858 * convert bytes to a character.
1859 */
1860 void
1861ins_char(c)
1862 int c;
1863{
1864#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1865 char_u buf[MB_MAXBYTES];
1866 int n;
1867
1868 n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);
1869
1870 /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
1871 * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
1872 if (buf[0] == 0)
1873 buf[0] = '\n';
1874
1875 ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
1876}
1877
1878 void
1879ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
1880 char_u *buf;
1881 int charlen;
1882{
1883 int c = buf[0];
1884 int l, j;
1885#endif
1886 int newlen; /* nr of bytes inserted */
1887 int oldlen; /* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
1888 char_u *p;
1889 char_u *newp;
1890 char_u *oldp;
1891 int linelen; /* length of old line including NUL */
1892 colnr_T col;
1893 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1894 int i;
1895
1896#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1897 /* Break tabs if needed. */
1898 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1899 coladvance_force(getviscol());
1900#endif
1901
1902 col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1903 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1904 linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;
1905
1906 /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
1907 oldlen = 0;
1908#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1909 newlen = charlen;
1910#else
1911 newlen = 1;
1912#endif
1913
1914 if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
1915 {
1916#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1917 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1918 {
1919 colnr_T new_vcol = 0; /* init for GCC */
1920 colnr_T vcol;
1921 int old_list;
1922#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1923 char_u buf[2];
1924#endif
1925
1926 /*
1927 * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
1928 * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
1929 * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
1930 */
1931 old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
1932 if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
1933 curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;
1934
1935 /*
1936 * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
1937 * characters (zero if it's a TAB). Count the number of bytes to
1938 * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
1939 * cells. May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
1940 */
1941 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
1942#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1943 buf[0] = c;
1944 buf[1] = NUL;
1945#endif
1946 new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
1947 while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
1948 {
1949 vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
1950 /* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
1951 * position. */
1952 if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
1953 break;
1954#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00001955 oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + oldlen);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001956#else
1957 ++oldlen;
1958#endif
1959 /* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
1960 if (vcol > new_vcol)
1961 newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
1962 }
1963 curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
1964 }
1965 else
1966#endif
1967 if (oldp[col] != NUL)
1968 {
1969 /* normal replace */
1970#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00001971 oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001972#else
1973 oldlen = 1;
1974#endif
1975 }
1976
1977
1978 /* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
1979 * put back when BS is used. The bytes of a multi-byte character are
1980 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
1981 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
1982 replace_push(NUL);
1983 for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
1984 {
1985#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00001986 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + i) - 1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001987 for (j = l; j >= 0; --j)
1988 replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]);
1989 i += l;
1990#else
1991 replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
1992#endif
1993 }
1994 }
1995
1996 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
1997 if (newp == NULL)
1998 return;
1999
2000 /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
2001 if (col > 0)
2002 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2003
2004 /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
2005 p = newp + col;
2006 mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
2007 (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));
2008
2009 /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
2010#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2011 mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
2012 i = charlen;
2013#else
2014 *p = c;
2015 i = 1;
2016#endif
2017
2018 /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
2019 while (i < newlen)
2020 p[i++] = ' ';
2021
2022 /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
2023 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2024
2025 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2026 changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2027
2028 /*
2029 * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
2030 * show the match for right parens and braces.
2031 */
2032 if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
2033 && msg_silent == 0
2034#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2035 && charlen == 1
2036#endif
2037 )
2038 showmatch(c);
2039
2040#ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
2041 if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
2042#endif
2043 {
2044 /* Normal insert: move cursor right */
2045#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2046 curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
2047#else
2048 ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
2049#endif
2050 }
2051 /*
2052 * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
2053 */
2054}
2055
2056/*
2057 * Insert a string at the cursor position.
2058 * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
2059 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2060 */
2061 void
2062ins_str(s)
2063 char_u *s;
2064{
2065 char_u *oldp, *newp;
2066 int newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
2067 int oldlen;
2068 colnr_T col;
2069 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2070
2071#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2072 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
2073 coladvance_force(getviscol());
2074#endif
2075
2076 col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2077 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2078 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2079
2080 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
2081 if (newp == NULL)
2082 return;
2083 if (col > 0)
2084 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2085 mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
2086 mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
2087 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2088 changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2089 curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
2090}
2091
2092/*
2093 * Delete one character under the cursor.
2094 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2095 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2096 *
2097 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2098 */
2099 int
2100del_char(fixpos)
2101 int fixpos;
2102{
2103#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2104 if (has_mbyte)
2105 {
2106 /* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
2107 mb_adjust_cursor();
2108 if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
2109 return FAIL;
2110 return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
2111 }
2112#endif
2113 return del_bytes(1L, fixpos);
2114}
2115
2116#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
2117/*
2118 * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
2119 */
2120 int
2121del_chars(count, fixpos)
2122 long count;
2123 int fixpos;
2124{
2125 long bytes = 0;
2126 long i;
2127 char_u *p;
2128 int l;
2129
2130 p = ml_get_cursor();
2131 for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
2132 {
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00002133 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002134 bytes += l;
2135 p += l;
2136 }
2137 return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos);
2138}
2139#endif
2140
2141/*
2142 * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
2143 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2144 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2145 *
2146 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2147 */
2148 int
2149del_bytes(count, fixpos)
2150 long count;
2151 int fixpos;
2152{
2153 char_u *oldp, *newp;
2154 colnr_T oldlen;
2155 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2156 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2157 int was_alloced;
2158 long movelen;
2159
2160 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2161 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2162
2163 /*
2164 * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
2165 */
2166 if (col >= oldlen)
2167 return FAIL;
2168
2169#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2170 /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
2171 * delete the last combining character. */
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00002172 if (p_deco && enc_utf8 && utfc_ptr2len(oldp + col) >= count)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002173 {
2174 int c1, c2;
2175 int n;
2176
2177 (void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, &c1, &c2);
2178 if (c1 != NUL)
2179 {
2180 /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
2181 n = col;
2182 do
2183 {
2184 col = n;
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00002185 count = utf_ptr2len(oldp + n);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002186 n += count;
2187 } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
2188 fixpos = 0;
2189 }
2190 }
2191#endif
2192
2193 /*
2194 * When count is too big, reduce it.
2195 */
2196 movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
2197 if (movelen <= 1)
2198 {
2199 /*
2200 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
2201 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2202 */
2203 if (col > 0 && fixpos)
2204 {
2205 --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2206#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2207 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
2208#endif
2209#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2210 if (has_mbyte)
2211 curwin->w_cursor.col -=
2212 (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
2213#endif
2214 }
2215 count = oldlen - col;
2216 movelen = 1;
2217 }
2218
2219 /*
2220 * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
2221 * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
2222 */
2223 was_alloced = ml_line_alloced(); /* check if oldp was allocated */
2224#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2225 if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans)
2226 netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count);
2227 /* else is handled by ml_replace() */
2228#endif
2229 if (was_alloced)
2230 newp = oldp; /* use same allocated memory */
2231 else
2232 { /* need to allocate a new line */
2233 newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
2234 if (newp == NULL)
2235 return FAIL;
2236 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2237 }
2238 mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
2239 if (!was_alloced)
2240 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2241
2242 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2243 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2244
2245 return OK;
2246}
2247
2248/*
2249 * Delete from cursor to end of line.
2250 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2251 *
2252 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2253 */
2254 int
2255truncate_line(fixpos)
2256 int fixpos; /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
2257{
2258 char_u *newp;
2259 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2260 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2261
2262 if (col == 0)
2263 newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
2264 else
2265 newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);
2266
2267 if (newp == NULL)
2268 return FAIL;
2269
2270 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2271
2272 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2273 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2274
2275 /*
2276 * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2277 */
2278 if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
2279 --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2280
2281 return OK;
2282}
2283
2284/*
2285 * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
2286 * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
2287 */
2288 void
2289del_lines(nlines, undo)
2290 long nlines; /* number of lines to delete */
2291 int undo; /* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
2292{
2293 long n;
2294
2295 if (nlines <= 0)
2296 return;
2297
2298 /* save the deleted lines for undo */
2299 if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL)
2300 return;
2301
2302 for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
2303 {
2304 if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY) /* nothing to delete */
2305 break;
2306
2307 ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE);
2308 ++n;
2309
2310 /* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
2311 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
2312 break;
2313 }
2314 /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2315 deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n);
2316
2317 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
2318 check_cursor_lnum();
2319}
2320
2321 int
2322gchar_pos(pos)
2323 pos_T *pos;
2324{
2325 char_u *ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);
2326
2327#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2328 if (has_mbyte)
2329 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
2330#endif
2331 return (int)*ptr;
2332}
2333
2334 int
2335gchar_cursor()
2336{
2337#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2338 if (has_mbyte)
2339 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
2340#endif
2341 return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
2342}
2343
2344/*
2345 * Write a character at the current cursor position.
2346 * It is directly written into the block.
2347 */
2348 void
2349pchar_cursor(c)
2350 int c;
2351{
2352 *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
2353 + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
2354}
2355
2356#if 0 /* not used */
2357/*
2358 * Put *pos at end of current buffer
2359 */
2360 void
2361goto_endofbuf(pos)
2362 pos_T *pos;
2363{
2364 char_u *p;
2365
2366 pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count;
2367 pos->col = 0;
2368 p = ml_get(pos->lnum);
2369 while (*p++)
2370 ++pos->col;
2371}
2372#endif
2373
2374/*
2375 * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
2376 * non-blank in the line.
2377 * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
2378 * the line.
2379 */
2380 int
2381inindent(extra)
2382 int extra;
2383{
2384 char_u *ptr;
2385 colnr_T col;
2386
2387 for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
2388 ++ptr;
2389 if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
2390 return TRUE;
2391 else
2392 return FALSE;
2393}
2394
2395/*
2396 * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
2397 */
2398 char_u *
2399skip_to_option_part(p)
2400 char_u *p;
2401{
2402 if (*p == ',')
2403 ++p;
2404 while (*p == ' ')
2405 ++p;
2406 return p;
2407}
2408
2409/*
2410 * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed.
2411 *
2412 * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
2413 * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
2414 */
2415 void
2416changed()
2417{
2418#if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
2419 /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
2420 * mean a change of the buffer yet. That is delayed until the
2421 * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
2422 if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
2423 return;
2424 xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
2425#endif
2426
2427 if (!curbuf->b_changed)
2428 {
2429 int save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;
2430
2431 change_warning(0);
2432 /* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
2433 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
2434 if (curbuf->b_may_swap
2435#ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
2436 && !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
2437#endif
2438 )
2439 {
2440 ml_open_file(curbuf);
2441
2442 /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
2443 * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
2444 * message. Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
2445 * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
2446 if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
2447 {
2448 out_flush();
2449 ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
2450 wait_return(TRUE);
2451 msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
2452 }
2453 }
2454 curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002455 ml_setflags(curbuf);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002456#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2457 check_status(curbuf);
2458#endif
2459#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2460 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */
2461#endif
2462 }
2463 ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002464}
2465
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002466static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum));
2467static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002468static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2469
2470/*
2471 * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
2472 * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2473 * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
2474 * - invalidates cached values
2475 */
2476 void
2477changed_bytes(lnum, col)
2478 linenr_T lnum;
2479 colnr_T col;
2480{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002481 changedOneline(curbuf, lnum);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002482 changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002483
2484#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2485 /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */
2486 if (curwin->w_p_diff)
2487 {
2488 win_T *wp;
2489 linenr_T wlnum;
2490
2491 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2492 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2493 {
2494 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2495 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2496 if (wlnum > 0)
2497 changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum);
2498 }
2499 }
2500#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002501}
2502
2503 static void
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002504changedOneline(buf, lnum)
2505 buf_T *buf;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002506 linenr_T lnum;
2507{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002508 if (buf->b_mod_set)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002509 {
2510 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002511 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2512 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2513 else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot)
2514 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002515 }
2516 else
2517 {
2518 /* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002519 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2520 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2521 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2522 buf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002523 }
2524}
2525
2526/*
2527 * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2528 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2529 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2530 */
2531 void
2532appended_lines(lnum, count)
2533 linenr_T lnum;
2534 long count;
2535{
2536 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2537}
2538
2539/*
2540 * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2541 */
2542 void
2543appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2544 linenr_T lnum;
2545 long count;
2546{
2547 mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
2548 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2549}
2550
2551/*
2552 * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2553 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2554 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2555 */
2556 void
2557deleted_lines(lnum, count)
2558 linenr_T lnum;
2559 long count;
2560{
2561 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2562}
2563
2564/*
2565 * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2566 */
2567 void
2568deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2569 linenr_T lnum;
2570 long count;
2571{
2572 mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
2573 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2574}
2575
2576/*
2577 * Changed lines for the current buffer.
2578 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2579 * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
2580 * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2581 * - invalidate cached values
2582 * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
2583 * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
2584 * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
2585 * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
2586 */
2587 void
2588changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2589 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */
2590 colnr_T col; /* column in first line with change */
2591 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */
2592 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2593{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002594 changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra);
2595
2596#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2597 if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff)
2598 {
2599 /* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't
2600 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for
2601 * displaying. */
2602 win_T *wp;
2603 linenr_T wlnum;
2604
2605 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2606 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2607 {
2608 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2609 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2610 if (wlnum > 0)
2611 changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum,
2612 lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L);
2613 }
2614 }
2615#endif
2616
2617 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
2618}
2619
2620 static void
2621changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra)
2622 buf_T *buf;
2623 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */
2624 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */
2625 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2626{
2627 if (buf->b_mod_set)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002628 {
2629 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002630 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2631 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2632 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002633 {
2634 /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002635 buf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
2636 if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
2637 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002638 }
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002639 if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot)
2640 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2641 buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002642 }
2643 else
2644 {
2645 /* set the area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002646 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2647 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2648 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2649 buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002650 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002651}
2652
2653 static void
2654changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2655 linenr_T lnum;
2656 colnr_T col;
2657 linenr_T lnume;
2658 long xtra;
2659{
2660 win_T *wp;
2661 int i;
2662#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2663 int cols;
2664 pos_T *p;
2665 int add;
2666#endif
2667
2668 /* mark the buffer as modified */
2669 changed();
2670
2671 /* set the '. mark */
2672 if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
2673 {
2674 curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
2675 curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;
2676
2677#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2678 /* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
2679 * don't have an entry yet. */
2680 if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2681 {
2682 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2683 add = TRUE;
2684 else
2685 {
2686 /* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
2687 * as the last one and the column is not too far away. Avoids
2688 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
2689 p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
2690 if (p->lnum != lnum)
2691 add = TRUE;
2692 else
2693 {
2694 cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
2695 if (cols == 0)
2696 cols = 79;
2697 add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
2698 }
2699 }
2700 if (add)
2701 {
2702 /* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
2703 * and it's at some distance of the last change. Use a new
2704 * position in the changelist. */
2705 curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;
2706
2707 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
2708 {
2709 /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
2710 curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
2711 mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
2712 sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
2713 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2714 {
2715 /* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
2716 * this buffer. */
2717 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
2718 --wp->w_changelistidx;
2719 }
2720 }
2721 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2722 {
2723 /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
2724 * at the end it stays at the end. */
2725 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
2726 && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
2727 ++wp->w_changelistidx;
2728 }
2729 ++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2730 }
2731 }
2732 curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
2733 curbuf->b_last_change;
2734 /* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
2735 * takes you back to it. */
2736 curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2737#endif
2738 }
2739
2740 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2741 {
2742 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
2743 {
2744 /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
2745 if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
2746 wp->w_redr_type = VALID;
2747
2748 /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
2749 * values for the cursor. */
2750#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2751 /*
2752 * Update the folds for this window. Can't postpone this, because
2753 * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
2754 */
2755 foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);
2756
2757 /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
2758 * included in a fold. Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
2759 * might be displayed differently.
2760 * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
2761 * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
2762 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
2763 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
2764 wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2765 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
2766 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
2767 wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2768
2769 /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
2770 * compare with the first line in that range. */
2771 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
2772 {
2773 i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
2774 if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
2775 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2776 }
2777#endif
2778
2779 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
2780 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2781 else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
2782 changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
2783 if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
2784 {
2785 /* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
2786 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
2787 approximate_botline_win(wp);
2788 }
2789
2790 /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
2791 * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
2792 * inserted/deleted lines. Makes it possible to stop displaying
2793 * after the change. */
2794 for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
2795 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
2796 {
2797 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
2798 {
2799 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
2800 {
2801 /* line included in change */
2802 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2803 }
2804 else if (xtra != 0)
2805 {
2806 /* line below change */
2807 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
2808#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2809 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
2810#endif
2811 }
2812 }
2813#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2814 else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
2815 {
2816 /* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
2817 * may need to be redrawn */
2818 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2819 }
2820#endif
2821 }
2822 }
2823 }
2824
2825 /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
2826 * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
2827 if (must_redraw < VALID)
2828 must_redraw = VALID;
2829}
2830
2831/*
2832 * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
2833 */
2834 void
2835unchanged(buf, ff)
2836 buf_T *buf;
2837 int ff; /* also reset 'fileformat' */
2838{
2839 if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf)))
2840 {
2841 buf->b_changed = 0;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002842 ml_setflags(buf);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002843 if (ff)
2844 save_file_ff(buf);
2845#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2846 check_status(buf);
2847#endif
2848#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2849 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */
2850#endif
2851 }
2852 ++buf->b_changedtick;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002853#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2854 netbeans_unmodified(buf);
2855#endif
2856}
2857
2858#if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
2859/*
2860 * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
2861 * need to be updated
2862 */
2863 void
2864check_status(buf)
2865 buf_T *buf;
2866{
2867 win_T *wp;
2868
2869 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2870 if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
2871 {
2872 wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
2873 if (must_redraw < VALID)
2874 must_redraw = VALID;
2875 }
2876}
2877#endif
2878
2879/*
2880 * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
2881 * Don't do this for autocommands.
2882 * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
Bram Moolenaard5cdbeb2005-10-10 20:59:28 +00002883 * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but "b_did_warn"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002884 * will be TRUE.
2885 */
2886 void
2887change_warning(col)
2888 int col; /* column for message; non-zero when in insert
2889 mode and 'showmode' is on */
2890{
2891 if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
2892 && curbufIsChanged() == 0
2893#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2894 && !autocmd_busy
2895#endif
2896 && curbuf->b_p_ro)
2897 {
2898#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2899 apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
2900 if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
2901 return;
2902#endif
2903 /*
2904 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
2905 * be after the mode message.
2906 */
2907 msg_start();
2908 if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
2909 msg_col = col;
Bram Moolenaar2df6dcc2004-07-12 15:53:54 +00002910 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002911 MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"),
2912 hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
2913 msg_clr_eos();
2914 (void)msg_end();
2915 if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
2916 {
2917 out_flush();
2918 ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
2919 }
2920 curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
2921 redraw_cmdline = FALSE; /* don't redraw and erase the message */
2922 if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
2923 showmode();
2924 }
2925}
2926
2927/*
2928 * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
2929 * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
2930 * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
2931 * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
2932 * from any buffers but directly from the user.
2933 *
2934 * return the 'y' or 'n'
2935 */
2936 int
2937ask_yesno(str, direct)
2938 char_u *str;
2939 int direct;
2940{
2941 int r = ' ';
2942 int save_State = State;
2943
2944 if (exiting) /* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
2945 settmode(TMODE_RAW);
2946 ++no_wait_return;
2947#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
2948 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */
2949#endif
2950 State = CONFIRM; /* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
2951#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2952 setmouse(); /* disables mouse for xterm */
2953#endif
2954 ++no_mapping;
2955 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
2956
2957 while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
2958 {
2959 /* same highlighting as for wait_return */
2960 smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
2961 if (direct)
2962 r = get_keystroke();
2963 else
2964 r = safe_vgetc();
2965 if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
2966 r = 'n';
2967 msg_putchar(r); /* show what you typed */
2968 out_flush();
2969 }
2970 --no_wait_return;
2971 State = save_State;
2972#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2973 setmouse();
2974#endif
2975 --no_mapping;
2976 --allow_keys;
2977
2978 return r;
2979}
2980
2981/*
2982 * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
2983 * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
2984 * button (used at the more prompt).
2985 * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
2986 * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
2987 * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
2988 */
2989 int
2990get_keystroke()
2991{
2992#define CBUFLEN 151
2993 char_u buf[CBUFLEN];
2994 int len = 0;
2995 int n;
2996 int save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
2997
2998 mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE; /* mappings are not used here */
2999 for (;;)
3000 {
3001 cursor_on();
3002 out_flush();
3003
3004 /* First time: blocking wait. Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
3005 * terminal code to complete. Leave some room for check_termcode() to
3006 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL). And
3007 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */
3008 n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3,
3009 len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
3010 if (n > 0)
3011 {
3012 /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
3013 n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
3014 len += n;
3015 }
3016
3017 /* incomplete termcode: get more characters */
3018 if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0)
3019 continue;
3020 /* found a termcode: adjust length */
3021 if (n > 0)
3022 len = n;
3023 if (len == 0) /* nothing typed yet */
3024 continue;
3025
3026 /* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
3027 n = buf[0];
3028 if (n == K_SPECIAL)
3029 {
3030 n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
3031 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
3032 || n == K_IGNORE
3033#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3034 || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
3035 || n == K_LEFTDRAG
3036 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE
3037 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
3038 || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
3039 || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG
3040 || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE
3041 || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE
3042 || n == K_RIGHTDRAG
3043 || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE
3044 || n == K_MOUSEDOWN
3045 || n == K_MOUSEUP
3046 || n == K_X1MOUSE
3047 || n == K_X1DRAG
3048 || n == K_X1RELEASE
3049 || n == K_X2MOUSE
3050 || n == K_X2DRAG
3051 || n == K_X2RELEASE
3052# ifdef FEAT_GUI
3053 || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
3054 || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
3055# endif
3056#endif
3057 )
3058 {
3059 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
3060 mod_mask = buf[2];
3061 len -= 3;
3062 if (len > 0)
3063 mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
3064 continue;
3065 }
3066 }
3067#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
3068 if (has_mbyte)
3069 {
3070 if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
3071 continue; /* more bytes to get */
3072 buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL;
3073 n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
3074 }
3075#endif
3076#ifdef UNIX
3077 if (n == intr_char)
3078 n = ESC;
3079#endif
3080 break;
3081 }
3082
3083 mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
3084 return n;
3085}
3086
3087/*
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003088 * Get a number from the user.
3089 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003090 */
3091 int
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003092get_number(colon, mouse_used)
3093 int colon; /* allow colon to abort */
3094 int *mouse_used;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003095{
3096 int n = 0;
3097 int c;
3098
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003099 if (mouse_used != NULL)
3100 *mouse_used = FALSE;
3101
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003102 /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
3103 * zero (as if CR was hit). */
3104 if (msg_silent != 0)
3105 return 0;
3106
3107#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3108 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */
3109#endif
3110 ++no_mapping;
3111 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3112 for (;;)
3113 {
3114 windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
3115 c = safe_vgetc();
3116 if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
3117 {
3118 n = n * 10 + c - '0';
3119 msg_putchar(c);
3120 }
3121 else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
3122 {
3123 n /= 10;
3124 MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
3125 }
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003126#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3127 else if (mouse_used != NULL && c == K_LEFTMOUSE)
3128 {
3129 *mouse_used = TRUE;
3130 n = mouse_row + 1;
3131 break;
3132 }
3133#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003134 else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
3135 {
3136 stuffcharReadbuff(':');
3137 if (!exmode_active)
3138 cmdline_row = msg_row;
3139 skip_redraw = TRUE; /* skip redraw once */
3140 do_redraw = FALSE;
3141 break;
3142 }
3143 else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
3144 break;
3145 }
3146 --no_mapping;
3147 --allow_keys;
3148 return n;
3149}
3150
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003151/*
3152 * Ask the user to enter a number.
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003153 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse and in that case return
3154 * the line number.
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003155 */
3156 int
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003157prompt_for_number(mouse_used)
3158 int *mouse_used;
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003159{
3160 int i;
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003161 int save_cmdline_row;
3162 int save_State;
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003163
3164 /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */
Bram Moolenaar42eeac32005-06-29 22:40:58 +00003165 if (mouse_used != NULL)
3166 MSG_PUTS(_("Type number or click with mouse (<Enter> cancels): "));
3167 else
3168 MSG_PUTS(_("Choice number (<Enter> cancels): "));
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003169
3170 /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted. */
3171 save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row;
3172 cmdline_row = Rows - 1;
3173 save_State = State;
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003174 if (mouse_used == NULL)
3175 State = CMDLINE;
3176 else
3177 State = NORMAL;
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003178
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003179 i = get_number(TRUE, mouse_used);
3180 if (KeyTyped)
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003181 {
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003182 /* don't call wait_return() now */
3183 /* msg_putchar('\n'); */
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003184 cmdline_row = msg_row - 1;
3185 need_wait_return = FALSE;
3186 msg_didany = FALSE;
3187 }
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003188 else
3189 cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row;
3190 State = save_State;
3191
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003192 return i;
3193}
3194
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003195 void
3196msgmore(n)
3197 long n;
3198{
3199 long pn;
3200
3201 if (global_busy /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003202 || !messaging()) /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
3203 return;
3204
Bram Moolenaar7df2d662005-01-25 22:18:08 +00003205 /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite
3206 * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and
3207 * then "put" reports the last action. */
3208 if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more)
3209 return;
3210
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003211 if (n > 0)
3212 pn = n;
3213 else
3214 pn = -n;
3215
3216 if (pn > p_report)
3217 {
3218 if (pn == 1)
3219 {
3220 if (n > 0)
3221 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line"));
3222 else
3223 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less"));
3224 }
3225 else
3226 {
3227 if (n > 0)
3228 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn);
3229 else
3230 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
3231 }
3232 if (got_int)
3233 STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)"));
3234 if (msg(msg_buf))
3235 {
3236 set_keep_msg(msg_buf);
3237 keep_msg_attr = 0;
Bram Moolenaar7df2d662005-01-25 22:18:08 +00003238 keep_msg_more = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003239 }
3240 }
3241}
3242
3243/*
3244 * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
3245 */
3246 void
3247beep_flush()
3248{
3249 if (emsg_silent == 0)
3250 {
3251 flush_buffers(FALSE);
3252 vim_beep();
3253 }
3254}
3255
3256/*
3257 * give a warning for an error
3258 */
3259 void
3260vim_beep()
3261{
3262 if (emsg_silent == 0)
3263 {
3264 if (p_vb
3265#ifdef FEAT_GUI
3266 /* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
3267 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
3268 && !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
3269#endif
3270 )
3271 {
3272 out_str(T_VB);
3273 }
3274 else
3275 {
3276#ifdef MSDOS
3277 /*
3278 * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
3279 * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
3280 * where the beeps don't overlap.
3281 */
3282 if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
3283 {
3284 out_char(BELL);
3285 beep_count = 1;
3286 }
3287 else
3288 ++beep_count;
3289#else
3290 out_char(BELL);
3291#endif
3292 }
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +00003293
3294 /* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a
3295 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */
3296 if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL)
3297 {
3298 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
3299 msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W));
3300 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003301 }
3302}
3303
3304/*
3305 * To get the "real" home directory:
3306 * - get value of $HOME
3307 * For Unix:
3308 * - go to that directory
3309 * - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
3310 * This also works with mounts and links.
3311 * Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
3312 */
3313static char_u *homedir = NULL;
3314
3315 void
3316init_homedir()
3317{
3318 char_u *var;
3319
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003320 /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */
3321 vim_free(homedir);
3322 homedir = NULL;
3323
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003324#ifdef VMS
3325 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3326#else
3327 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3328#endif
3329
3330 if (var != NULL && *var == NUL) /* empty is same as not set */
3331 var = NULL;
3332
3333#ifdef WIN3264
3334 /*
3335 * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
3336 * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%". Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
3337 * when $HOME is being set.
3338 */
3339 if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
3340 {
3341 char_u *p;
3342 char_u *exp;
3343
3344 p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
3345 if (p != NULL)
3346 {
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003347 vim_strncpy(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003348 exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
3349 if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
3350 && STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
3351 {
Bram Moolenaar555b2802005-05-19 21:08:39 +00003352 vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003353 var = NameBuff;
3354 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3355 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3356 }
3357 }
3358 }
3359
3360 /*
3361 * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
3362 * specifically defined it for Vim's sake. However, on Windows NT
3363 * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
3364 * each user. Try constructing $HOME from these.
3365 */
3366 if (var == NULL)
3367 {
3368 char_u *homedrive, *homepath;
3369
3370 homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
3371 homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
3372 if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL
3373 && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
3374 {
3375 sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
3376 if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
3377 {
3378 var = NameBuff;
3379 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3380 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3381 }
3382 }
3383 }
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003384
3385# if defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
3386 if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL)
3387 {
3388 int len;
3389 char_u *pp;
3390
3391 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are
3392 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3393 acp_to_enc(var, STRLEN(var), &pp, &len);
3394 if (pp != NULL)
3395 {
3396 homedir = pp;
3397 return;
3398 }
3399 }
3400# endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003401#endif
3402
3403#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3404 /*
3405 * Default home dir is C:/
3406 * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
3407 */
3408 if (var == NULL)
3409 var = "C:/";
3410#endif
3411 if (var != NULL)
3412 {
3413#ifdef UNIX
3414 /*
3415 * Change to the directory and get the actual path. This resolves
3416 * links. Don't do it when we can't return.
3417 */
3418 if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
3419 && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
3420 {
3421 if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
3422 var = IObuff;
3423 if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
3424 EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
3425 }
3426#endif
3427 homedir = vim_strsave(var);
3428 }
3429}
3430
Bram Moolenaarf461c8e2005-06-25 23:04:51 +00003431#if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO)
3432 void
3433free_homedir()
3434{
3435 vim_free(homedir);
3436}
3437#endif
3438
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003439/*
3440 * Expand environment variable with path name.
3441 * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME. For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
3442 * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$".
3443 * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
3444 */
3445 void
3446expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
3447 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3448 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
3449 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
3450{
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003451 expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE, NULL);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003452}
3453
3454 void
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003455expand_env_esc(srcp, dst, dstlen, esc, startstr)
3456 char_u *srcp; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003457 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
3458 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
3459 int esc; /* escape spaces in expanded variables */
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003460 char_u *startstr; /* start again after this (can be NULL) */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003461{
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003462 char_u *src;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003463 char_u *tail;
3464 int c;
3465 char_u *var;
3466 int copy_char;
3467 int mustfree; /* var was allocated, need to free it later */
3468 int at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003469 int startstr_len = 0;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003470
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003471 if (startstr != NULL)
3472 startstr_len = STRLEN(startstr);
3473
3474 src = skipwhite(srcp);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003475 --dstlen; /* leave one char space for "\," */
3476 while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3477 {
3478 copy_char = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003479 if ((*src == '$'
3480#ifdef VMS
3481 && at_start
3482#endif
3483 )
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003484#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3485 || *src == '%'
3486#endif
3487 || (*src == '~' && at_start))
3488 {
3489 mustfree = FALSE;
3490
3491 /*
3492 * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
3493 * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
3494 */
3495 if (*src != '~') /* environment var */
3496 {
3497 tail = src + 1;
3498 var = dst;
3499 c = dstlen - 1;
3500
3501#ifdef UNIX
3502 /* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
3503 if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
3504 {
3505 tail++; /* ignore '{' */
3506 while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
3507 *var++ = *tail++;
3508 }
3509 else
3510#endif
3511 {
3512 while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
3513#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3514 || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3515#endif
3516 ))
3517 {
3518#ifdef OS2 /* env vars only in uppercase */
3519 *var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
3520 tail++; /* toupper() may be a macro! */
3521#else
3522 *var++ = *tail++;
3523#endif
3524 }
3525 }
3526
3527#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3528# ifdef UNIX
3529 if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
3530# else
3531 if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3532# endif
3533 var = NULL;
3534 else
3535 {
3536# ifdef UNIX
3537 if (src[1] == '{')
3538# else
3539 if (*src == '%')
3540#endif
3541 ++tail;
3542#endif
3543 *var = NUL;
3544 var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
3545#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3546 }
3547#endif
3548 }
3549 /* home directory */
3550 else if ( src[1] == NUL
3551 || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
3552 || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
3553 {
3554 var = homedir;
3555 tail = src + 1;
3556 }
3557 else /* user directory */
3558 {
3559#if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
3560 /*
3561 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
3562 */
3563 tail = src;
3564 var = dst;
3565 c = dstlen - 1;
3566 while ( c-- > 0
3567 && *tail
3568 && vim_isfilec(*tail)
3569 && !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3570 *var++ = *tail++;
3571 *var = NUL;
3572# ifdef UNIX
3573 /*
3574 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
3575 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
3576 * expand ~user. This is slower and may fail if the shell
3577 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
3578 */
3579# if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
3580 {
3581 struct passwd *pw;
3582
3583 pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
3584 if (pw != NULL)
3585 var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
3586 else
3587 var = NULL;
3588 }
3589 if (var == NULL)
3590# endif
3591 {
3592 expand_T xpc;
3593
3594 ExpandInit(&xpc);
3595 xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
3596 var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
3597 WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
3598 ExpandCleanup(&xpc);
3599 mustfree = TRUE;
3600 }
3601
3602# else /* !UNIX, thus VMS */
3603 /*
3604 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
3605 * directories to search for the user account in.
3606 */
3607 {
3608 char_u test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
3609 char_u *path, *next_path, *ptr;
3610 struct stat st;
3611
3612 STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
3613 next_path = paths;
3614 while (*next_path)
3615 {
3616 for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
3617 next_path++);
3618 if (*next_path)
3619 *next_path++ = NUL;
3620 STRCPY(test, path);
3621 STRCAT(test, "/");
3622 STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
3623 if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
3624 {
3625 var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
3626 STRCPY(var, test);
3627 mustfree = TRUE;
3628 break;
3629 }
3630 }
3631 }
3632# endif /* UNIX */
3633#else
3634 /* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
3635 var = NULL;
3636 tail = (char_u *)""; /* for gcc */
3637#endif /* UNIX || VMS */
3638 }
3639
3640#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
3641 /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
3642 * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
3643 if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
3644 {
3645 char_u *p = vim_strsave(var);
3646
3647 if (p != NULL)
3648 {
3649 if (mustfree)
3650 vim_free(var);
3651 var = p;
3652 mustfree = TRUE;
3653 forward_slash(var);
3654 }
3655 }
3656#endif
3657
3658 /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
3659 * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
3660 if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
3661 {
3662 char_u *p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");
3663
3664 if (p != NULL)
3665 {
3666 if (mustfree)
3667 vim_free(var);
3668 var = p;
3669 mustfree = TRUE;
3670 }
3671 }
3672
3673 if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
3674 && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
3675 {
3676 STRCPY(dst, var);
3677 dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003678 c = STRLEN(var);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003679 /* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
3680 * with it, skip a character */
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003681 if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003682#if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
3683 && dst[-1] != ':'
3684#endif
3685 && vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3686 ++tail;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003687 dst += c;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003688 src = tail;
3689 copy_char = FALSE;
3690 }
3691 if (mustfree)
3692 vim_free(var);
3693 }
3694
3695 if (copy_char) /* copy at least one char */
3696 {
3697 /*
3698 * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'.
3699 */
3700 at_start = FALSE;
3701 if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
3702 {
3703 *dst++ = *src++;
3704 --dstlen;
3705 }
3706 else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',')
3707 at_start = TRUE;
3708 *dst++ = *src++;
3709 --dstlen;
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003710
3711 if (startstr != NULL && src - startstr_len >= srcp
3712 && STRNCMP(src - startstr_len, startstr, startstr_len) == 0)
3713 at_start = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003714 }
3715 }
3716 *dst = NUL;
3717}
3718
3719/*
3720 * Vim's version of getenv().
3721 * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
Bram Moolenaar2f6b0b82005-03-08 22:43:10 +00003722 * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003723 */
3724 char_u *
3725vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
3726 char_u *name;
3727 int *mustfree; /* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */
3728{
3729 char_u *p;
3730 char_u *pend;
3731 int vimruntime;
3732
3733#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3734 /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
3735 if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
3736 return homedir;
3737#endif
3738
3739 p = mch_getenv(name);
3740 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */
3741 p = NULL;
3742
3743 if (p != NULL)
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003744 {
3745#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3746 if (enc_utf8)
3747 {
3748 int len;
3749 char_u *pp;
3750
3751 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are
3752 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3753 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3754 if (pp != NULL)
3755 {
3756 p = pp;
3757 *mustfree = TRUE;
3758 }
3759 }
3760#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003761 return p;
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003762 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003763
3764 vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
3765 if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
3766 return NULL;
3767
3768 /*
3769 * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
3770 * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
3771 */
3772 if (vimruntime
3773#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3774 && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
3775#endif
3776 )
3777 {
3778 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3779 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */
3780 p = NULL;
3781 if (p != NULL)
3782 {
3783 p = vim_version_dir(p);
3784 if (p != NULL)
3785 *mustfree = TRUE;
3786 else
3787 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003788
3789#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3790 if (enc_utf8)
3791 {
3792 int len;
3793 char_u *pp;
3794
3795 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions
3796 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII
3797 * characters. */
3798 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3799 if (pp != NULL)
3800 {
3801 if (mustfree)
3802 vim_free(p);
3803 p = pp;
3804 *mustfree = TRUE;
3805 }
3806 }
3807#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003808 }
3809 }
3810
3811 /*
3812 * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
3813 * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
3814 * - the executable name from argv[0]
3815 */
3816 if (p == NULL)
3817 {
3818 if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
3819 p = p_hf;
3820#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3821 /*
3822 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
3823 */
3824 else
3825 p = exe_name;
3826#endif
3827 if (p != NULL)
3828 {
3829 /* remove the file name */
3830 pend = gettail(p);
3831
3832 /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
3833 if (p == p_hf)
3834 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");
3835
3836#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3837# ifdef MACOS_X
3838 /* remove "build/..." from exe_name, if present */
3839 if (p == exe_name)
3840 {
3841 char_u *pend1;
3842 char_u *pend2;
3843
3844 pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"Contents/MacOS");
3845 pend2 = remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend1, (char_u *)".app");
3846 pend = remove_tail(p, pend2, (char_u *)"build");
3847 /* When runnig from project builder get rid of the
3848 * build/???.app, otherwise keep the ???.app */
3849 if (pend2 == pend)
3850 pend = pend1;
3851 }
3852# endif
3853 /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
3854 if (p == exe_name)
3855 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
3856#endif
3857
3858 /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
3859 if (!vimruntime)
3860 {
3861 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
3862 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
3863 }
3864
3865 /* remove trailing path separator */
3866#ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
3867 /* With MacOS path (with colons) the final colon is required */
3868 /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003869 if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003870 --pend;
3871#endif
3872
3873 /* check that the result is a directory name */
3874 p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));
3875
3876 if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
3877 {
3878 vim_free(p);
3879 p = NULL;
3880 }
3881 else
3882 {
3883#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3884 /* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
3885 if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
3886 {
3887 vim_free(p);
3888 p = pend;
3889 }
3890#endif
3891 *mustfree = TRUE;
3892 }
3893 }
3894 }
3895
3896#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3897 /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
3898 * default_vimruntime_dir */
3899 if (p == NULL)
3900 {
3901 /* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
3902 if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
3903 {
3904 p = default_vimruntime_dir;
3905 *mustfree = FALSE;
3906 }
3907 else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
3908 {
3909 if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
3910 *mustfree = TRUE;
3911 else
3912 {
3913 p = default_vim_dir;
3914 *mustfree = FALSE;
3915 }
3916 }
3917 }
3918#endif
3919
3920 /*
3921 * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
3922 * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
3923 */
3924 if (p != NULL)
3925 {
3926 if (vimruntime)
3927 {
3928 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
3929 didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
3930#ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
3931 {
Bram Moolenaard6754642005-01-17 22:18:45 +00003932 char_u *buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang");
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003933
3934 if (buf != NULL)
3935 {
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003936 bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
3937 vim_free(buf);
3938 }
3939 }
3940#endif
3941 }
3942 else
3943 {
3944 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
3945 didset_vim = TRUE;
3946 }
3947 }
3948 return p;
3949}
3950
3951/*
3952 * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
3953 * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
3954 */
3955 static char_u *
3956vim_version_dir(vimdir)
3957 char_u *vimdir;
3958{
3959 char_u *p;
3960
3961 if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
3962 return NULL;
3963 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
3964 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3965 return p;
3966 vim_free(p);
3967 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
3968 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3969 return p;
3970 vim_free(p);
3971 return NULL;
3972}
3973
3974/*
3975 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
3976 * the length of "name/". Otherwise return "pend".
3977 */
3978 static char_u *
3979remove_tail(p, pend, name)
3980 char_u *p;
3981 char_u *pend;
3982 char_u *name;
3983{
3984 int len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
3985 char_u *newend = pend - len;
3986
3987 if (newend >= p
3988 && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003989 && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend)))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003990 return newend;
3991 return pend;
3992}
3993
3994#if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
3995/*
3996 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "???.ext/", return "pend"
3997 * minus the length of "???.ext/". Otherwise return "pend".
3998 */
3999 static char_u *
4000remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend, ext)
4001 char_u *p;
4002 char_u *pend;
4003 char_u *ext;
4004{
4005 int len = (int)STRLEN(ext) + 1;
4006 char_u *newend = pend - len;
4007
4008 if (newend >= p && fnamencmp(newend, ext, len - 1) == 0)
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +00004009 while (newend > p && !after_pathsep(p, newend))
4010 mb_ptr_back(p, newend);
4011 if (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004012 return newend;
4013 return pend;
4014}
4015#endif
4016
4017/*
4018 * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
4019 * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
4020 * again soon.
4021 */
4022 char_u *
4023expand_env_save(src)
4024 char_u *src;
4025{
4026 char_u *p;
4027
4028 p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
4029 if (p != NULL)
4030 expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL);
4031 return p;
4032}
4033
4034/*
4035 * Our portable version of setenv.
4036 */
4037 void
4038vim_setenv(name, val)
4039 char_u *name;
4040 char_u *val;
4041{
4042#ifdef HAVE_SETENV
4043 mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
4044#else
4045 char_u *envbuf;
4046
4047 /*
4048 * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
4049 * valid. The allocated memory will never be freed.
4050 */
4051 envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
4052 if (envbuf != NULL)
4053 {
4054 sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
4055 putenv((char *)envbuf);
4056 }
4057#endif
4058}
4059
4060#if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
4061/*
4062 * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
4063 */
4064/*ARGSUSED*/
4065 char_u *
4066get_env_name(xp, idx)
4067 expand_T *xp;
4068 int idx;
4069{
4070# if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
4071 /*
4072 * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
4073 */
4074 return NULL;
4075# else
4076# ifndef __WIN32__
4077 /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
4078 extern char **environ;
4079# endif
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00004080# define ENVNAMELEN 100
4081 static char_u name[ENVNAMELEN];
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004082 char_u *str;
4083 int n;
4084
4085 str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
4086 if (str == NULL)
4087 return NULL;
4088
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00004089 for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004090 {
4091 if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
4092 break;
4093 name[n] = str[n];
4094 }
4095 name[n] = NUL;
4096 return name;
4097# endif
4098}
4099#endif
4100
4101/*
4102 * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
4103 * 'src'.
4104 * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
4105 */
4106 void
4107home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
4108 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */
4109 char_u *src; /* input file name */
4110 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
4111 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
4112 int one; /* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
4113 spaces and commas in the file name. */
4114{
4115 size_t dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
4116 size_t len;
4117 char_u *homedir_env;
4118 char_u *p;
4119
4120 if (src == NULL)
4121 {
4122 *dst = NUL;
4123 return;
4124 }
4125
4126 /*
4127 * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
4128 */
4129 if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
4130 {
4131 STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
4132 return;
4133 }
4134
4135 /*
4136 * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
4137 * "real" home directory.
4138 */
4139 if (homedir != NULL)
4140 dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);
4141
4142#ifdef VMS
4143 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
4144#else
4145 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
4146#endif
4147
4148 if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
4149 homedir_env = NULL;
4150 if (homedir_env != NULL)
4151 envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);
4152
4153 if (!one)
4154 src = skipwhite(src);
4155 while (*src && dstlen > 0)
4156 {
4157 /*
4158 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
4159 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
4160 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
4161 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
4162 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
4163 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
4164 * er's home directory)).
4165 */
4166 p = homedir;
4167 len = dirlen;
4168 for (;;)
4169 {
4170 if ( len
4171 && fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
4172 && (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
4173 || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
4174 || src[len] == NUL))
4175 {
4176 src += len;
4177 if (--dstlen > 0)
4178 *dst++ = '~';
4179
4180 /*
4181 * If it's just the home directory, add "/".
4182 */
4183 if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
4184 *dst++ = '/';
4185 break;
4186 }
4187 if (p == homedir_env)
4188 break;
4189 p = homedir_env;
4190 len = envlen;
4191 }
4192
4193 /* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
4194 while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
4195 *dst++ = *src++;
4196 /* skip separator */
4197 while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
4198 *dst++ = *src++;
4199 }
4200 /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */
4201
4202 *dst = NUL;
4203}
4204
4205/*
4206 * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
4207 * When something fails, NULL is returned.
4208 */
4209 char_u *
4210home_replace_save(buf, src)
4211 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */
4212 char_u *src; /* input file name */
4213{
4214 char_u *dst;
4215 unsigned len;
4216
4217 len = 3; /* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
4218 if (src != NULL) /* just in case */
4219 len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
4220 dst = alloc(len);
4221 if (dst != NULL)
4222 home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
4223 return dst;
4224}
4225
4226/*
4227 * Compare two file names and return:
4228 * FPC_SAME if they both exist and are the same file.
4229 * FPC_SAMEX if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
4230 * FPC_DIFF if they both exist and are different files.
4231 * FPC_NOTX if they both don't exist.
4232 * FPC_DIFFX if one of them doesn't exist.
4233 * For the first name environment variables are expanded
4234 */
4235 int
4236fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
4237 char_u *s1, *s2;
4238 int checkname; /* when both don't exist, check file names */
4239{
4240#ifdef UNIX
4241 char_u exp1[MAXPATHL];
4242 char_u full1[MAXPATHL];
4243 char_u full2[MAXPATHL];
4244 struct stat st1, st2;
4245 int r1, r2;
4246
4247 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4248 r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
4249 r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
4250 if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
4251 {
4252 /* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
4253 if (checkname)
4254 {
4255 if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4256 return FPC_SAMEX;
4257 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4258 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4259 if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
4260 return FPC_SAMEX;
4261 }
4262 return FPC_NOTX;
4263 }
4264 if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
4265 return FPC_DIFFX;
4266 if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
4267 return FPC_SAME;
4268 return FPC_DIFF;
4269#else
4270 char_u *exp1; /* expanded s1 */
4271 char_u *full1; /* full path of s1 */
4272 char_u *full2; /* full path of s2 */
4273 int retval = FPC_DIFF;
4274 int r1, r2;
4275
4276 /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
4277 if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
4278 {
4279 full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
4280 full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;
4281
4282 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4283 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4284 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4285
4286 /* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
4287 if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
4288 {
4289 if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4290 retval = FPC_SAMEX;
4291 else
4292 retval = FPC_NOTX;
4293 }
4294 else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
4295 retval = FPC_DIFFX;
4296 else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
4297 retval = FPC_DIFF;
4298 else
4299 retval = FPC_SAME;
4300 vim_free(exp1);
4301 }
4302 return retval;
4303#endif
4304}
4305
4306/*
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004307 * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
4308 * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004309 */
4310 char_u *
4311gettail(fname)
4312 char_u *fname;
4313{
4314 char_u *p1, *p2;
4315
4316 if (fname == NULL)
4317 return (char_u *)"";
4318 for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; ) /* find last part of path */
4319 {
4320 if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
4321 p1 = p2 + 1;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004322 mb_ptr_adv(p2);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004323 }
4324 return p1;
4325}
4326
4327/*
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004328 * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators. Putting a NUL
4329 * here leaves the directory name. Takes care of "c:/" and "//".
4330 * Always returns a valid pointer.
4331 */
4332 char_u *
4333gettail_sep(fname)
4334 char_u *fname;
4335{
4336 char_u *p;
4337 char_u *t;
4338
4339 p = get_past_head(fname); /* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */
4340 t = gettail(fname);
4341 while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t))
4342 --t;
4343#ifdef VMS
4344 /* path separator is part of the path */
4345 ++t;
4346#endif
4347 return t;
4348}
4349
4350/*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004351 * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
4352 */
4353 char_u *
4354getnextcomp(fname)
4355 char_u *fname;
4356{
4357 while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004358 mb_ptr_adv(fname);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004359 if (*fname)
4360 ++fname;
4361 return fname;
4362}
4363
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004364/*
4365 * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
4366 * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
4367 * If there is no head, path is returned.
4368 */
4369 char_u *
4370get_past_head(path)
4371 char_u *path;
4372{
4373 char_u *retval;
4374
4375#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
4376 /* may skip "c:" */
4377 if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
4378 retval = path + 2;
4379 else
4380 retval = path;
4381#else
4382# if defined(AMIGA)
4383 /* may skip "label:" */
4384 retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
4385 if (retval == NULL)
4386 retval = path;
4387# else /* Unix */
4388 retval = path;
4389# endif
4390#endif
4391
4392 while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
4393 ++retval;
4394
4395 return retval;
4396}
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004397
4398/*
4399 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
4400 */
4401 int
4402vim_ispathsep(c)
4403 int c;
4404{
4405#ifdef RISCOS
4406 return (c == '.' || c == ':');
4407#else
4408# ifdef UNIX
4409 return (c == '/'); /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
4410# else
4411# ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
4412 return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
4413# else
4414# ifdef VMS
4415 /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
4416 return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
4417 || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
4418# else
4419# ifdef COLON_AS_PATHSEP
4420 return (c == ':');
4421# else /* Amiga */
4422 return (c == ':' || c == '/');
4423# endif
4424# endif /* VMS */
4425# endif
4426# endif
4427#endif /* RISC OS */
4428}
4429
4430#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
4431/*
4432 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
4433 */
4434 int
4435vim_ispathlistsep(c)
4436 int c;
4437{
4438#ifdef UNIX
4439 return (c == ':');
4440#else
4441 return (c == ';'); /* might not be rigth for every system... */
4442#endif
4443}
4444#endif
4445
Bram Moolenaar900b4d72005-12-12 22:05:50 +00004446/*
4447 * Return TRUE if the directory of "fname" exists, FALSE otherwise.
4448 * Also returns TRUE if there is no directory name.
4449 * "fname" must be writable!.
4450 */
4451 int
4452dir_of_file_exists(fname)
4453 char_u *fname;
4454{
4455 char_u *p;
4456 int c;
4457 int retval;
4458
4459 p = gettail_sep(fname);
4460 if (p == fname)
4461 return TRUE;
4462 c = *p;
4463 *p = NUL;
4464 retval = mch_isdir(fname);
4465 *p = c;
4466 return retval;
4467}
4468
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004469#if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \
4470 || defined(PROTO)
4471/*
4472 * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally.
4473 */
4474 int
4475vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
4476 char_u *x, *y;
4477{
4478 return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
4479}
4480
4481 int
4482vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
4483 char_u *x, *y;
4484 size_t len;
4485{
4486 while (len > 0 && *x && *y)
4487 {
4488 if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y)
4489 && !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\')
4490 && !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/'))
4491 break;
4492 ++x;
4493 ++y;
4494 --len;
4495 }
4496 if (len == 0)
4497 return 0;
4498 return (*x - *y);
4499}
4500#endif
4501
4502/*
4503 * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
4504 * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary.
4505 */
4506 char_u *
4507concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
4508 char_u *fname1;
4509 char_u *fname2;
4510 int sep;
4511{
4512 char_u *dest;
4513
4514 dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
4515 if (dest != NULL)
4516 {
4517 STRCPY(dest, fname1);
4518 if (sep)
4519 add_pathsep(dest);
4520 STRCAT(dest, fname2);
4521 }
4522 return dest;
4523}
4524
Bram Moolenaard6754642005-01-17 22:18:45 +00004525#if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) || defined(PROTO)
4526/*
4527 * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory.
4528 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4529 */
4530 char_u *
4531concat_str(str1, str2)
4532 char_u *str1;
4533 char_u *str2;
4534{
4535 char_u *dest;
4536 size_t l = STRLEN(str1);
4537
4538 dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L));
4539 if (dest != NULL)
4540 {
4541 STRCPY(dest, str1);
4542 STRCPY(dest + l, str2);
4543 }
4544 return dest;
4545}
4546#endif
4547
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004548/*
4549 * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
4550 * separator.
4551 */
4552 void
4553add_pathsep(p)
4554 char_u *p;
4555{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004556 if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p)))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004557 STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
4558}
4559
4560/*
4561 * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
4562 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4563 */
4564 char_u *
4565FullName_save(fname, force)
4566 char_u *fname;
4567 int force; /* force expansion, even when it already looks
4568 like a full path name */
4569{
4570 char_u *buf;
4571 char_u *new_fname = NULL;
4572
4573 if (fname == NULL)
4574 return NULL;
4575
4576 buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
4577 if (buf != NULL)
4578 {
4579 if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
4580 new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
4581 else
4582 new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
4583 vim_free(buf);
4584 }
4585 return new_fname;
4586}
4587
4588#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)
4589
4590static char_u *skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));
4591
4592/*
4593 * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
4594 * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
4595 */
4596 pos_T *
4597find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
4598 int ind_maxcomment;
4599{
4600 pos_T *pos;
4601 char_u *line;
4602 char_u *p;
4603
4604 if ((pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, ind_maxcomment)) == NULL)
4605 return NULL;
4606
4607 /*
4608 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
4609 */
4610 line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
4611 for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
4612 p = skip_string(p);
4613 if ((unsigned)(p - line) > pos->col)
4614 return NULL;
4615 return pos;
4616}
4617
4618/*
4619 * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
4620 * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
4621 */
4622 static char_u *
4623skip_string(p)
4624 char_u *p;
4625{
4626 int i;
4627
4628 /*
4629 * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
4630 */
4631 for ( ; ; ++p)
4632 {
4633 if (p[0] == '\'') /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
4634 {
4635 if (!p[1]) /* ' at end of line */
4636 break;
4637 i = 2;
4638 if (p[1] == '\\') /* '\n' or '\000' */
4639 {
4640 ++i;
4641 while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1])) /* '\000' */
4642 ++i;
4643 }
4644 if (p[i] == '\'') /* check for trailing ' */
4645 {
4646 p += i;
4647 continue;
4648 }
4649 }
4650 else if (p[0] == '"') /* start of string */
4651 {
4652 for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
4653 {
4654 if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
4655 ++p;
4656 else if (p[0] == '"') /* end of string */
4657 break;
4658 }
4659 if (p[0] == '"')
4660 continue;
4661 }
4662 break; /* no string found */
4663 }
4664 if (!*p)
4665 --p; /* backup from NUL */
4666 return p;
4667}
4668#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */
4669
4670#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)
4671
4672/*
4673 * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
4674 */
4675 void
4676do_c_expr_indent()
4677{
4678# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
4679 if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
4680 fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
4681 else
4682# endif
4683 fixthisline(get_c_indent);
4684}
4685
4686/*
4687 * Functions for C-indenting.
4688 * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
4689 */
4690/*
4691 * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
4692 */
4693
4694static char_u *cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4695static int cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
4696static pos_T *find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
4697static int cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
4698static int cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
4699static char_u *after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
4700static int get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4701static int skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
4702static int cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
4703static int cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4704static int cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
4705static int cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
4706static int cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4707static int cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4708static int cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
4709static int cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
4710static int cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T));
4711static int cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
4712static int cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
4713static int cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
4714static int cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
4715static int cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
4716static int cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col));
4717static int cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
4718static int cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
4719static pos_T *find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
4720static pos_T *find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
4721static int corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
4722static int find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
4723static int find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4724
4725/*
4726 * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
4727 */
4728 static char_u *
4729cin_skipcomment(s)
4730 char_u *s;
4731{
4732 while (*s)
4733 {
4734 s = skipwhite(s);
4735 if (*s != '/')
4736 break;
4737 ++s;
4738 if (*s == '/') /* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
4739 {
4740 s += STRLEN(s);
4741 break;
4742 }
4743 if (*s != '*')
4744 break;
4745 for (++s; *s; ++s) /* skip slash-star comment */
4746 if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
4747 {
4748 s += 2;
4749 break;
4750 }
4751 }
4752 return s;
4753}
4754
4755/*
4756 * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s. White space and comments are
4757 * not considered code.
4758 */
4759 static int
4760cin_nocode(s)
4761 char_u *s;
4762{
4763 return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
4764}
4765
4766/*
4767 * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
4768 */
4769 static pos_T *
4770find_line_comment() /* XXX */
4771{
4772 static pos_T pos;
4773 char_u *line;
4774 char_u *p;
4775
4776 pos = curwin->w_cursor;
4777 while (--pos.lnum > 0)
4778 {
4779 line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
4780 p = skipwhite(line);
4781 if (cin_islinecomment(p))
4782 {
4783 pos.col = (int)(p - line);
4784 return &pos;
4785 }
4786 if (*p != NUL)
4787 break;
4788 }
4789 return NULL;
4790}
4791
4792/*
4793 * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
4794 */
4795 static int
4796cin_islabel_skip(s)
4797 char_u **s;
4798{
4799 if (!vim_isIDc(**s)) /* need at least one ID character */
4800 return FALSE;
4801
4802 while (vim_isIDc(**s))
4803 (*s)++;
4804
4805 *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);
4806
4807 /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
4808 return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
4809}
4810
4811/*
4812 * Recognize a label: "label:".
4813 * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
4814 */
4815 int
4816cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
4817 int ind_maxcomment;
4818{
4819 char_u *s;
4820
4821 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4822
4823 /*
4824 * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
4825 * like a switch label. Same for C++ scope declarations.
4826 */
4827 if (cin_isdefault(s))
4828 return FALSE;
4829 if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
4830 return FALSE;
4831
4832 if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
4833 {
4834 /*
4835 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
4836 * label.
4837 */
4838 pos_T cursor_save;
4839 pos_T *trypos;
4840 char_u *line;
4841
4842 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4843 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
4844 {
4845 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4846
4847 /*
4848 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
4849 */
4850 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
4851 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
4852 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
4853
4854 line = ml_get_curline();
4855 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
4856 continue;
4857 if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
4858 continue;
4859
4860 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4861 if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
4862 || cin_isscopedecl(line)
4863 || cin_iscase(line)
4864 || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
4865 return TRUE;
4866 return FALSE;
4867 }
4868 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4869 return TRUE; /* label at start of file??? */
4870 }
4871 return FALSE;
4872}
4873
4874/*
4875 * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations.
4876 * Q&D-Implementation:
4877 * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line.
4878 */
4879 static int
4880cin_isinit(void)
4881{
4882 char_u *s;
4883
4884 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4885
4886 if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7]))
4887 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);
4888
4889 if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4890 return TRUE;
4891
4892 if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
4893 return TRUE;
4894
4895 return FALSE;
4896}
4897
4898/*
4899 * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
4900 */
4901 int
4902cin_iscase(s)
4903 char_u *s;
4904{
4905 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4906 if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4907 {
4908 for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
4909 {
4910 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4911 if (*s == ':')
4912 {
4913 if (s[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4914 ++s;
4915 else
4916 return TRUE;
4917 }
4918 if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
4919 s += 2; /* skip over '.' */
4920 else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
4921 return FALSE; /* stop at comment */
4922 else if (*s == '"')
4923 return FALSE; /* stop at string */
4924 }
4925 return FALSE;
4926 }
4927
4928 if (cin_isdefault(s))
4929 return TRUE;
4930 return FALSE;
4931}
4932
4933/*
4934 * Recognize a "default" switch label.
4935 */
4936 static int
4937cin_isdefault(s)
4938 char_u *s;
4939{
4940 return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
4941 && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
4942 && s[1] != ':');
4943}
4944
4945/*
4946 * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label.
4947 */
4948 int
4949cin_isscopedecl(s)
4950 char_u *s;
4951{
4952 int i;
4953
4954 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4955 if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
4956 i = 6;
4957 else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
4958 i = 9;
4959 else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
4960 i = 7;
4961 else
4962 return FALSE;
4963 return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
4964}
4965
4966/*
4967 * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
4968 * Return NULL if not found.
4969 * case 234: a = b;
4970 * ^
4971 */
4972 static char_u *
4973after_label(l)
4974 char_u *l;
4975{
4976 for ( ; *l; ++l)
4977 {
4978 if (*l == ':')
4979 {
4980 if (l[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4981 ++l;
4982 else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1))
4983 break;
4984 }
4985 else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
4986 l += 2; /* skip over 'x' */
4987 }
4988 if (*l == NUL)
4989 return NULL;
4990 l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
4991 if (*l == NUL)
4992 return NULL;
4993 return l;
4994}
4995
4996/*
4997 * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
4998 * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
4999 */
5000 static int
5001get_indent_nolabel(lnum) /* XXX */
5002 linenr_T lnum;
5003{
5004 char_u *l;
5005 pos_T fp;
5006 colnr_T col;
5007 char_u *p;
5008
5009 l = ml_get(lnum);
5010 p = after_label(l);
5011 if (p == NULL)
5012 return 0;
5013
5014 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
5015 fp.lnum = lnum;
5016 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5017 return (int)col;
5018}
5019
5020/*
5021 * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
5022 * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label).
5023 * label: if (asdf && asdfasdf)
5024 * ^
5025 */
5026 static int
5027skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
5028 linenr_T lnum;
5029 char_u **pp;
5030 int ind_maxcomment;
5031{
5032 char_u *l;
5033 int amount;
5034 pos_T cursor_save;
5035
5036 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5037 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5038 l = ml_get_curline();
5039 /* XXX */
5040 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
5041 {
5042 amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
5043 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
5044 if (l == NULL) /* just in case */
5045 l = ml_get_curline();
5046 }
5047 else
5048 {
5049 amount = get_indent();
5050 l = ml_get_curline();
5051 }
5052 *pp = l;
5053
5054 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5055 return amount;
5056}
5057
5058/*
5059 * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
5060 * int a, indent of "a"
5061 * static struct foo b, indent of "b"
5062 * enum bla c, indent of "c"
5063 * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
5064 */
5065 static int
5066cin_first_id_amount()
5067{
5068 char_u *line, *p, *s;
5069 int len;
5070 pos_T fp;
5071 colnr_T col;
5072
5073 line = ml_get_curline();
5074 p = skipwhite(line);
5075 len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5076 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
5077 {
5078 p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5079 len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5080 }
5081 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
5082 p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5083 else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
5084 p = skipwhite(p + 4);
5085 else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
5086 || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
5087 {
5088 s = skipwhite(p + len);
5089 if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
5090 || (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
5091 || (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
5092 || (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
5093 p = s;
5094 }
5095 for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
5096 ;
5097 if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
5098 return 0;
5099
5100 p = skipwhite(p + len);
5101 fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5102 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
5103 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5104 return (int)col;
5105}
5106
5107/*
5108 * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
5109 * char *foo = "here";
5110 * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
5111 * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
5112 * foo = "asdf\
5113 * asdf\
5114 * here";
5115 */
5116 static int
5117cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
5118 linenr_T lnum;
5119{
5120 char_u *line;
5121 char_u *s;
5122 colnr_T col;
5123 pos_T fp;
5124
5125 if (lnum > 1)
5126 {
5127 line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
5128 if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
5129 return -1;
5130 }
5131
5132 line = s = ml_get(lnum);
5133 while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
5134 {
5135 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5136 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5137 else
5138 ++s;
5139 }
5140 if (*s != '=')
5141 return 0;
5142
5143 s = skipwhite(s + 1);
5144 if (cin_nocode(s))
5145 return 0;
5146
5147 if (*s == '"') /* nice alignment for continued strings */
5148 ++s;
5149
5150 fp.lnum = lnum;
5151 fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5152 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5153 return (int)col;
5154}
5155
5156/*
5157 * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
5158 */
5159 static int
5160cin_ispreproc(s)
5161 char_u *s;
5162{
5163 s = skipwhite(s);
5164 if (*s == '#')
5165 return TRUE;
5166 return FALSE;
5167}
5168
5169/*
5170 * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
5171 * continuation line of a preprocessor statement. Decrease "*lnump" to the
5172 * start and return the line in "*pp".
5173 */
5174 static int
5175cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
5176 char_u **pp;
5177 linenr_T *lnump;
5178{
5179 char_u *line = *pp;
5180 linenr_T lnum = *lnump;
5181 int retval = FALSE;
5182
Bram Moolenaard8e9bb22005-07-09 21:14:46 +00005183 for (;;)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005184 {
5185 if (cin_ispreproc(line))
5186 {
5187 retval = TRUE;
5188 *lnump = lnum;
5189 break;
5190 }
5191 if (lnum == 1)
5192 break;
5193 line = ml_get(--lnum);
5194 if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
5195 break;
5196 }
5197
5198 if (lnum != *lnump)
5199 *pp = ml_get(*lnump);
5200 return retval;
5201}
5202
5203/*
5204 * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
5205 */
5206 static int
5207cin_iscomment(p)
5208 char_u *p;
5209{
5210 return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
5211}
5212
5213/*
5214 * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
5215 */
5216 static int
5217cin_islinecomment(p)
5218 char_u *p;
5219{
5220 return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
5221}
5222
5223/*
5224 * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'.
5225 * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
5226 * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
5227 * both apply in order to determine initializations).
5228 */
5229 static int
5230cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
5231 char_u *s;
5232 int incl_open; /* include '{' at the end as terminator */
5233 int incl_comma; /* recognize a trailing comma */
5234{
5235 char_u found_start = 0;
5236
5237 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5238
5239 if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
5240 found_start = *s;
5241
5242 while (*s)
5243 {
5244 /* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
5245 s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
5246 if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}'
5247 || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
5248 && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5249 return *s;
5250
5251 if (*s)
5252 s++;
5253 }
5254 return found_start;
5255}
5256
5257/*
5258 * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
5259 * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
5260 * no semicolons anywhere.
5261 * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
5262 * "sp" points to a string with the line. When looking at other lines it must
5263 * be restored to the line. When it's NULL fetch lines here.
5264 * "lnum" is where we start looking.
5265 */
5266 static int
5267cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum)
5268 char_u **sp;
5269 linenr_T first_lnum;
5270{
5271 char_u *s;
5272 linenr_T lnum = first_lnum;
5273 int retval = FALSE;
5274
5275 if (sp == NULL)
5276 s = ml_get(lnum);
5277 else
5278 s = *sp;
5279
5280 while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5281 {
5282 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5283 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5284 else
5285 ++s;
5286 }
5287 if (*s != '(')
5288 return FALSE; /* ';', ' or " before any () or no '(' */
5289
5290 while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5291 {
5292 if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5293 {
5294 /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
5295 * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
5296 * #if defined(x) && \
5297 * defined(y)
5298 */
5299 lnum = first_lnum - 1;
5300 s = ml_get(lnum);
5301 if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
5302 retval = TRUE;
5303 goto done;
5304 }
5305 if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5306 {
5307 /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */
5308 if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
5309 break;
5310
5311 s = ml_get(++lnum);
5312 }
5313 else if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5314 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5315 else
5316 ++s;
5317 }
5318
5319done:
5320 if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
5321 *sp = ml_get(first_lnum);
5322
5323 return retval;
5324}
5325
5326 static int
5327cin_isif(p)
5328 char_u *p;
5329{
5330 return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5331}
5332
5333 static int
5334cin_iselse(p)
5335 char_u *p;
5336{
5337 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} else" */
5338 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5339 return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
5340}
5341
5342 static int
5343cin_isdo(p)
5344 char_u *p;
5345{
5346 return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5347}
5348
5349/*
5350 * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
5351 * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
5352 * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
5353 */
5354 static int
5355cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen) /* XXX */
5356 char_u *p;
5357 linenr_T lnum;
5358 int ind_maxparen;
5359{
5360 pos_T cursor_save;
5361 pos_T *trypos;
5362 int retval = FALSE;
5363
5364 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5365 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} while (cond);" */
5366 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5367 if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]))
5368 {
5369 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5370 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5371 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5372 p = ml_get_curline();
5373 while (*p && *p != 'w') /* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
5374 {
5375 ++p;
5376 ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
5377 }
5378 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
5379 && *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
5380 retval = TRUE;
5381 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5382 }
5383 return retval;
5384}
5385
5386 static int
5387cin_isbreak(p)
5388 char_u *p;
5389{
5390 return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
5391}
5392
5393/* Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
5394 * constructor-initialization. eg:
5395 *
5396 * class MyClass :
5397 * baseClass <-- here
5398 * class MyClass : public baseClass,
5399 * anotherBaseClass <-- here (should probably lineup ??)
5400 * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
5401 * baseClass(...) <-- here (constructor-initialization)
5402 */
5403 static int
5404cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col)
5405 char_u *line;
5406 colnr_T *col;
5407{
5408 char_u *s;
5409 int class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
5410
5411 *col = 0;
5412
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00005413 s = skipwhite(line);
5414 if (*s == '#') /* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */
5415 return FALSE;
5416 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005417 if (*s == NUL)
5418 return FALSE;
5419
5420 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5421
5422 while(*s != NUL)
5423 {
5424 if (s[0] == ':')
5425 {
5426 if (s[1] == ':')
5427 {
5428 /* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
5429 * initialization any more */
5430 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5431 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
5432 }
5433 else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
5434 {
5435 /* we have something found, that looks like the start of
5436 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */
5437 cpp_base_class = TRUE;
5438 lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5439 *col = 0;
5440 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5441 }
5442 else
5443 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5444 }
5445 else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5446 || (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
5447 {
5448 class_or_struct = TRUE;
5449 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5450
5451 if (*s == 'c')
5452 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
5453 else
5454 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
5455 }
5456 else
5457 {
5458 if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
5459 {
5460 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5461 }
5462 else if (s[0] == ')')
5463 {
5464 /* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
5465 * something like "):" */
5466 class_or_struct = FALSE;
5467 lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
5468 }
5469 else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
5470 {
5471 /* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
5472 class_or_struct = FALSE;
5473 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5474 }
5475 else if (*col == 0)
5476 {
5477 /* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
5478 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5479
5480 /* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
5481 if (cpp_base_class && *col == 0)
5482 *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5483 }
5484
5485 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5486 }
5487 }
5488
5489 return cpp_base_class;
5490}
5491
5492/*
5493 * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
5494 * white space and comments. Skip strings and comments.
5495 * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
5496 */
5497 static int
5498cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
5499 char_u *s;
5500 char_u *find;
5501 char_u *ignore;
5502{
5503 char_u *p = s;
5504 char_u *r;
5505 int len = (int)STRLEN(find);
5506
5507 while (*p != NUL)
5508 {
5509 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5510 if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
5511 {
5512 r = skipwhite(p + len);
5513 if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
5514 r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
5515 if (cin_nocode(r))
5516 return TRUE;
5517 }
5518 if (*p != NUL)
5519 ++p;
5520 }
5521 return FALSE;
5522}
5523
5524/*
5525 * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
5526 * Return the column found.
5527 */
5528 static int
5529cin_skip2pos(trypos)
5530 pos_T *trypos;
5531{
5532 char_u *line;
5533 char_u *p;
5534
5535 p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5536 while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
5537 {
5538 if (cin_iscomment(p))
5539 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5540 else
5541 {
5542 p = skip_string(p);
5543 ++p;
5544 }
5545 }
5546 return (int)(p - line);
5547}
5548
5549/*
5550 * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
5551 * Return NULL if no match found.
5552 * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
5553 * work. */
5554/* foo() */
5555/* { */
5556/* } */
5557
5558 static pos_T *
5559find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
5560 int ind_maxcomment;
5561{
5562 pos_T cursor_save;
5563 pos_T *trypos;
5564 pos_T *pos;
5565 static pos_T pos_copy;
5566
5567 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5568 while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
5569 {
5570 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
5571 trypos = &pos_copy;
5572 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5573 pos = NULL;
5574 /* ignore the { if it's in a // comment */
5575 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
5576 && (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
5577 break;
5578 if (pos != NULL)
5579 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
5580 }
5581 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5582 return trypos;
5583}
5584
5585/*
5586 * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
5587 * Return NULL of no match found.
5588 */
5589 static pos_T *
5590find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
5591 int ind_maxparen;
5592 int ind_maxcomment;
5593{
5594 pos_T cursor_save;
5595 pos_T *trypos;
5596 static pos_T pos_copy;
5597
5598 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5599 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
5600 {
5601 /* check if the ( is in a // comment */
5602 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
5603 trypos = NULL;
5604 else
5605 {
5606 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
5607 trypos = &pos_copy;
5608 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5609 if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
5610 trypos = NULL;
5611 }
5612 }
5613 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5614 return trypos;
5615}
5616
5617/*
5618 * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
5619 * cursor position and "startpos". This makes sure that searching for a
5620 * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
5621 * looking a few lines further.
5622 */
5623 static int
5624corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
5625 int ind_maxparen;
5626 pos_T *startpos;
5627{
5628 long n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5629
5630 if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
5631 return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
5632 return ind_maxparen;
5633}
5634
5635/*
5636 * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
5637 * line "l".
5638 */
5639 static int
5640find_last_paren(l, start, end)
5641 char_u *l;
5642 int start, end;
5643{
5644 int i;
5645 int retval = FALSE;
5646 int open_count = 0;
5647
5648 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; /* default is start of line */
5649
5650 for (i = 0; l[i]; i++)
5651 {
5652 i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
5653 i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in quotes */
5654 if (l[i] == start)
5655 ++open_count;
5656 else if (l[i] == end)
5657 {
5658 if (open_count > 0)
5659 --open_count;
5660 else
5661 {
5662 curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5663 retval = TRUE;
5664 }
5665 }
5666 }
5667 return retval;
5668}
5669
5670 int
5671get_c_indent()
5672{
5673 /*
5674 * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
5675 * block should be
5676 */
5677 int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5678
5679 /*
5680 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
5681 * line is imagined to be.
5682 */
5683 int ind_open_imag = 0;
5684
5685 /*
5686 * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by
5687 * an opening brace.
5688 */
5689 int ind_no_brace = 0;
5690
5691 /*
5692 * column where the first { of a function should be located }
5693 */
5694 int ind_first_open = 0;
5695
5696 /*
5697 * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
5698 * located
5699 */
5700 int ind_open_extra = 0;
5701
5702 /*
5703 * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
5704 * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
5705 * brace should be located
5706 */
5707 int ind_close_extra = 0;
5708
5709 /*
5710 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
5711 * column is imagined to be
5712 */
5713 int ind_open_left_imag = 0;
5714
5715 /*
5716 * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
5717 */
5718 int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5719
5720 /*
5721 * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
5722 */
5723 int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5724
5725 /*
5726 * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
5727 */
5728 int ind_case_break = 0;
5729
5730 /*
5731 * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
5732 * should be located
5733 */
5734 int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5735
5736 /*
5737 * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
5738 */
5739 int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5740
5741 /*
5742 * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
5743 */
5744 int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5745
5746 /*
5747 * amount a function type spec should be indented
5748 */
5749 int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5750
5751 /*
5752 * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
5753 * should be indented
5754 */
5755 int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5756
5757 /*
5758 * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
5759 * should be located
5760 */
5761 int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5762
5763 /*
5764 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
5765 */
5766 int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2;
5767
5768 /*
5769 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
5770 * itself is also unclosed
5771 */
5772 int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5773
5774 /*
5775 * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
5776 * unclosed parentheses.
5777 */
5778 int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;
5779
5780 /*
5781 * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
5782 * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
5783 * context (for very long lines).
5784 */
5785 int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;
5786
5787 /*
5788 * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
5789 * an unclosed parentheses.
5790 */
5791 int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;
5792
5793 /*
5794 * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
5795 * opening parentheses.
5796 */
5797 int ind_matching_paren = 0;
5798
5799 /*
5800 * Extra indent for comments.
5801 */
5802 int ind_comment = 0;
5803
5804 /*
5805 * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
5806 */
5807 int ind_in_comment = 3;
5808
5809 /*
5810 * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
5811 * after the comment opener.
5812 */
5813 int ind_in_comment2 = 0;
5814
5815 /*
5816 * max lines to search for an open paren
5817 */
5818 int ind_maxparen = 20;
5819
5820 /*
5821 * max lines to search for an open comment
5822 */
5823 int ind_maxcomment = 70;
5824
5825 /*
5826 * handle braces for java code
5827 */
5828 int ind_java = 0;
5829
5830 /*
5831 * handle blocked cases correctly
5832 */
5833 int ind_keep_case_label = 0;
5834
5835 pos_T cur_curpos;
5836 int amount;
5837 int scope_amount;
5838 int cur_amount;
5839 colnr_T col;
5840 char_u *theline;
5841 char_u *linecopy;
5842 pos_T *trypos;
5843 pos_T *tryposBrace = NULL;
5844 pos_T our_paren_pos;
5845 char_u *start;
5846 int start_brace;
5847#define BRACE_IN_COL0 1 /* '{' is in comumn 0 */
5848#define BRACE_AT_START 2 /* '{' is at start of line */
5849#define BRACE_AT_END 3 /* '{' is at end of line */
5850 linenr_T ourscope;
5851 char_u *l;
5852 char_u *look;
5853 char_u terminated;
5854 int lookfor;
5855#define LOOKFOR_INITIAL 0
5856#define LOOKFOR_IF 1
5857#define LOOKFOR_DO 2
5858#define LOOKFOR_CASE 3
5859#define LOOKFOR_ANY 4
5860#define LOOKFOR_TERM 5
5861#define LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6
5862#define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL 7
5863#define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 8
5864#define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS 9
5865#define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT 10
5866
5867 int whilelevel;
5868 linenr_T lnum;
5869 char_u *options;
5870 int fraction = 0; /* init for GCC */
5871 int divider;
5872 int n;
5873 int iscase;
5874 int lookfor_break;
5875 int cont_amount = 0; /* amount for continuation line */
5876
5877 for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
5878 {
5879 l = options++;
5880 if (*options == '-')
5881 ++options;
5882 n = getdigits(&options);
5883 divider = 0;
5884 if (*options == '.') /* ".5s" means a fraction */
5885 {
5886 fraction = atol((char *)++options);
5887 while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
5888 {
5889 ++options;
5890 if (divider)
5891 divider *= 10;
5892 else
5893 divider = 10;
5894 }
5895 }
5896 if (*options == 's') /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
5897 {
5898 if (n == 0 && fraction == 0)
5899 n = curbuf->b_p_sw; /* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
5900 else
5901 {
5902 n *= curbuf->b_p_sw;
5903 if (divider)
5904 n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
5905 }
5906 ++options;
5907 }
5908 if (l[1] == '-')
5909 n = -n;
5910 /* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
5911 * change.txt, and add explanation for it! */
5912 switch (*l)
5913 {
5914 case '>': ind_level = n; break;
5915 case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
5916 case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
5917 case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
5918 case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
5919 case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
5920 case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
5921 case ':': ind_case = n; break;
5922 case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
5923 case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
5924 case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
5925 case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
5926 case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
5927 case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
5928 case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
5929 case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
5930 case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
5931 case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
5932 case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
5933 case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
5934 case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
5935 case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
5936 case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
5937 case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
5938 case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
5939 case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
5940 case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
5941 case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
5942 case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
5943 }
5944 }
5945
5946 /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
5947 cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;
5948
5949 /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
5950 * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
5951 * ml_get is valid! */
5952 linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
5953 if (linecopy == NULL)
5954 return 0;
5955
5956 /*
5957 * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
5958 * cursor position. We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
5959 * inserting new stuff.
5960 * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
5961 * check for that.
5962 */
5963 if ((State & INSERT)
5964 && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy)
5965 && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
5966 linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
5967
5968 theline = skipwhite(linecopy);
5969
5970 /* move the cursor to the start of the line */
5971
5972 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5973
5974 /*
5975 * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
5976 */
5977 if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
5978 {
5979 amount = 0;
5980 }
5981
5982 /*
5983 * Is it a non-case label? Then that goes at the left margin too.
5984 */
5985 else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) /* XXX */
5986 {
5987 amount = 0;
5988 }
5989
5990 /*
5991 * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
5992 * previous line, lineup with that one.
5993 */
5994 else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
5995 && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
5996 {
5997 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5998 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5999 amount = col;
6000 }
6001
6002 /*
6003 * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
6004 * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
6005 */
6006 else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
6007 && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
6008 {
6009 int lead_start_len = 2;
6010 int lead_middle_len = 1;
6011 char_u lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* start-comment string */
6012 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */
6013 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */
6014 char_u *p;
6015 int start_align = 0;
6016 int start_off = 0;
6017 int done = FALSE;
6018
6019 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
6020 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6021 amount = col;
6022
6023 p = curbuf->b_p_com;
6024 while (*p != NUL)
6025 {
6026 int align = 0;
6027 int off = 0;
6028 int what = 0;
6029
6030 while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
6031 {
6032 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
6033 what = *p++;
6034 else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
6035 align = *p++;
6036 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
6037 off = getdigits(&p);
6038 else
6039 ++p;
6040 }
6041
6042 if (*p == ':')
6043 ++p;
6044 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
6045 if (what == COM_START)
6046 {
6047 STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
6048 lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
6049 start_off = off;
6050 start_align = align;
6051 }
6052 else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
6053 {
6054 STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
6055 lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
6056 }
6057 else if (what == COM_END)
6058 {
6059 /* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
6060 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
6061 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
6062 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
6063 {
6064 done = TRUE;
6065 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6066 {
6067 /* If the start comment string matches in the previous
6068 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset. If
6069 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
6070 * line, use the indent of that line. XXX */
6071 look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
6072 if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
6073 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6074 else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
6075 lead_middle_len) == 0)
6076 {
6077 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6078 break;
6079 }
6080 /* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
6081 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
6082 else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
6083 lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
6084 continue;
6085 }
6086 if (start_off != 0)
6087 amount += start_off;
6088 else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00006089 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6090 - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006091 break;
6092 }
6093
6094 /* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
6095 * with the middle comment */
6096 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
6097 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
6098 {
6099 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6100 /* XXX */
6101 if (off != 0)
6102 amount += off;
6103 else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00006104 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6105 - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006106 done = TRUE;
6107 break;
6108 }
6109 }
6110 }
6111
6112 /* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
6113 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
6114 * with the first character of the comment text.
6115 */
6116 if (done)
6117 ;
6118 else if (theline[0] == '*')
6119 amount += 1;
6120 else
6121 {
6122 /*
6123 * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
6124 * the indent of the previous non-empty line. If 'cino' has "CO"
6125 * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
6126 * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
6127 * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
6128 */
6129 amount = -1;
6130 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
6131 {
6132 if (linewhite(lnum)) /* skip blank lines */
6133 continue;
6134 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */
6135 break;
6136 }
6137 if (amount == -1) /* use the comment opener */
6138 {
6139 if (!ind_in_comment2)
6140 {
6141 start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
6142 look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
6143 if (*look != NUL) /* if something after it */
6144 trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
6145 }
6146 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6147 amount = col;
6148 if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
6149 amount += ind_in_comment;
6150 }
6151 }
6152 }
6153
6154 /*
6155 * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
6156 */ /* XXX */
6157 else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6158 && ind_java == 0)
6159 || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6160 || trypos != NULL)
6161 {
6162 if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
6163 {
6164 /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found. Use the one which is
6165 * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
6166 if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
6167 ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
6168 : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
6169 trypos = NULL;
6170 else
6171 tryposBrace = NULL;
6172 }
6173
6174 if (trypos != NULL)
6175 {
6176 /*
6177 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
6178 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
6179 */
6180 amount = -1;
6181 cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6182 our_paren_pos = *trypos;
6183 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
6184 {
6185 l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
6186 if (cin_nocode(l)) /* skip comment lines */
6187 continue;
6188 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
6189 continue;
6190 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
6191
6192 /* Skip a comment. XXX */
6193 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6194 {
6195 lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6196 continue;
6197 }
6198
6199 /* XXX */
6200 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
6201 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6202 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6203 && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
6204 && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
6205 {
6206 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */
6207
6208 if (theline[0] == ')')
6209 {
6210 if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum && cur_amount > amount)
6211 cur_amount = amount;
6212 amount = -1;
6213 }
6214 break;
6215 }
6216 }
6217
6218 /*
6219 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
6220 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
6221 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
6222 */
6223 if (amount == -1)
6224 {
6225 amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
6226 if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0
6227 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6228 {
6229 /*
6230 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
6231 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
6232 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
6233 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
6234 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
6235 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
6236 * lines).
6237 */
6238 if (theline[0] != ')')
6239 {
6240 cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6241 l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
6242 if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
6243 && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
6244 {
6245 /* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
6246 * for each additional level */
6247 n = 1;
6248 for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
6249 {
6250 switch (l[col])
6251 {
6252 case '(':
6253 case '{': ++n;
6254 break;
6255
6256 case ')':
6257 case '}': if (n > 1)
6258 --n;
6259 break;
6260 }
6261 }
6262
6263 our_paren_pos.col = 0;
6264 amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
6265 }
6266 else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
6267 our_paren_pos.col++;
6268 else
6269 {
6270 col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
6271 while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
6272 col++;
6273 if (l[col] != NUL) /* In case of trailing space */
6274 our_paren_pos.col = col;
6275 else
6276 our_paren_pos.col++;
6277 }
6278 }
6279
6280 /*
6281 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
6282 * if we did the above "if".
6283 */
6284 if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6285 {
6286 getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6287 if (cur_amount > (int)col)
6288 cur_amount = col;
6289 }
6290 }
6291
6292 if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
6293 {
6294 /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6295 }
6296 else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
6297 && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6298 {
6299 if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
6300 amount = cur_amount;
6301 }
6302 else
6303 {
6304 /* add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one */
6305 col = our_paren_pos.col;
6306 while (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6307 {
6308 --our_paren_pos.col;
6309 switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
6310 {
6311 case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
6312 col = our_paren_pos.col;
6313 break;
6314 case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
6315 col = MAXCOL;
6316 break;
6317 }
6318 }
6319
6320 /* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
6321 * braces */
6322 if (col == MAXCOL)
6323 amount += ind_unclosed;
6324 else
6325 {
6326 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6327 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6328 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6329 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6330 amount += ind_unclosed2;
6331 else
6332 amount += ind_unclosed;
6333 }
6334 /*
6335 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
6336 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
6337 * lines:
6338 * func_long_name( if (x
6339 * arg && yy
6340 * ) ^ not here ) ^ not here
6341 */
6342 if (cur_amount < amount)
6343 amount = cur_amount;
6344 }
6345 }
6346
6347 /* add extra indent for a comment */
6348 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
6349 amount += ind_comment;
6350 }
6351
6352 /*
6353 * Are we at least inside braces, then?
6354 */
6355 else
6356 {
6357 trypos = tryposBrace;
6358
6359 ourscope = trypos->lnum;
6360 start = ml_get(ourscope);
6361
6362 /*
6363 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
6364 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
6365 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
6366 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
6367 */
6368 look = skipwhite(start);
6369 if (*look == '{')
6370 {
6371 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6372 amount = col;
6373 if (*start == '{')
6374 start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
6375 else
6376 start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
6377 }
6378 else
6379 {
6380 /*
6381 * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
6382 * line. if so, find the start of the line.
6383 */
6384 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;
6385
6386 /*
6387 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6388 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6389 */
6390 lnum = ourscope;
6391 if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
6392 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6393 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6394 lnum = trypos->lnum;
6395
6396 /*
6397 * It could have been something like
6398 * case 1: if (asdf &&
6399 * ldfd) {
6400 * }
6401 */
6402 if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6403 amount = get_indent();
6404 else
6405 amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);
6406
6407 start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
6408 }
6409
6410 /*
6411 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
6412 * we want to be. otherwise, add the amount of room
6413 * that an indent is supposed to be.
6414 */
6415 if (theline[0] == '}')
6416 {
6417 /*
6418 * they may want closing braces to line up with something
6419 * other than the open brace. indulge them, if so.
6420 */
6421 amount += ind_close_extra;
6422 }
6423 else
6424 {
6425 /*
6426 * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
6427 * to match it with.
6428 * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
6429 * to match it with.
6430 */
6431 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6432 if (cin_iselse(theline))
6433 lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
6434 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6435 /* XXX */
6436 lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
6437 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
6438 {
6439 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
6440 if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
6441 ind_maxcomment) == OK)
6442 {
6443 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
6444 goto theend;
6445 }
6446 }
6447
6448 /*
6449 * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
6450 * failed to find a matching "if").
6451 * Search backwards for something to line up with.
6452 * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
6453 */
6454
6455 /*
6456 * if the '{' is _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
6457 * location of a left-margin brace. Otherwise, correct the
6458 * location for ind_open_extra.
6459 */
6460
6461 if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0) /* '{' is in column 0 */
6462 {
6463 amount = ind_open_left_imag;
6464 }
6465 else
6466 {
6467 if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END) /* '{' is at end of line */
6468 amount += ind_open_imag;
6469 else
6470 {
6471 /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
6472 amount -= ind_open_extra;
6473 if (amount < 0)
6474 amount = 0;
6475 }
6476 }
6477
6478 lookfor_break = FALSE;
6479
6480 if (cin_iscase(theline)) /* it's a switch() label */
6481 {
6482 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE; /* find a previous switch() label */
6483 amount += ind_case;
6484 }
6485 else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline)) /* private:, ... */
6486 {
6487 lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL; /* class decl is this block */
6488 amount += ind_scopedecl;
6489 }
6490 else
6491 {
6492 if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline)) /* break; ... */
6493 lookfor_break = TRUE;
6494
6495 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6496 amount += ind_level; /* ind_level from start of block */
6497 }
6498 scope_amount = amount;
6499 whilelevel = 0;
6500
6501 /*
6502 * Search backwards. If we find something we recognize, line up
6503 * with that.
6504 *
6505 * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
6506 * the usual amount relative to the conditional
6507 * that opens the block.
6508 */
6509 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6510 for (;;)
6511 {
6512 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6513 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6514
6515 /*
6516 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
6517 * up with it.
6518 */
6519 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
6520 {
6521 /* we reached end of scope:
6522 * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
6523 * go further back:
6524 * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
6525 * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
6526 * declaration:
6527 * int x,
6528 * here; <-- add ind_continuation
6529 */
6530 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6531 {
6532 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
6533 || curwin->w_cursor.lnum
6534 < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
6535 {
6536 /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
6537 * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
6538 * initialization) */
6539 if (cont_amount > 0)
6540 amount = cont_amount;
6541 else
6542 amount += ind_continuation;
6543 break;
6544 }
6545
6546 l = ml_get_curline();
6547
6548 /*
6549 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
6550 * comment.
6551 */
6552 trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
6553 if (trypos != NULL)
6554 {
6555 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6556 continue;
6557 }
6558
6559 /*
6560 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
6561 */
6562 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6563 continue;
6564
6565 if (cin_nocode(l))
6566 continue;
6567
6568 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6569
6570 /*
6571 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
6572 * function declaration, we are done
6573 * (it's a variable declaration).
6574 */
6575 if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
6576 || !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6577 {
6578 /* if the line is terminated with another ','
6579 * it is a continued variable initialization.
6580 * don't add extra indent.
6581 * TODO: does not work, if a function
6582 * declaration is split over multiple lines:
6583 * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
6584 */
6585 if (terminated == ',')
6586 break;
6587
6588 /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
6589 * we are done.
6590 */
6591 if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
6592 break;
6593
6594 /* nothing useful found */
6595 if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
6596 continue;
6597 }
6598
6599 if (terminated != ';')
6600 {
6601 /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
6602 * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
6603 * will take us back to the start of the line.
6604 */ /* XXX */
6605 trypos = NULL;
6606 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
6607 trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6608 ind_maxcomment);
6609
6610 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6611 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6612
6613 if (trypos != NULL)
6614 {
6615 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6616 continue;
6617 }
6618 }
6619
6620 /* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
6621 * like in
6622 * int a,
6623 * b;
6624 */
6625 if (cont_amount > 0)
6626 amount = cont_amount;
6627 else
6628 amount += ind_continuation;
6629 }
6630 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6631 {
6632 if (cont_amount > 0)
6633 amount = cont_amount;
6634 else
6635 amount += ind_continuation;
6636 }
6637 else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6638 && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6639 {
6640 amount = scope_amount;
6641 if (theline[0] == '{')
6642 amount += ind_open_extra;
6643 }
6644 break;
6645 }
6646
6647 /*
6648 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
6649 */ /* XXX */
6650 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6651 {
6652 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6653 continue;
6654 }
6655
6656 l = ml_get_curline();
6657
6658 /*
6659 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
6660 * if this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
6661 */
6662 iscase = cin_iscase(l);
6663 if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6664 {
6665 /* we are only looking for cpp base class
6666 * declaration/initialization any longer */
6667 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6668 break;
6669
6670 /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
6671 * labels. */
6672 if (whilelevel > 0)
6673 continue;
6674
6675 /*
6676 * case xx:
6677 * c = 99 + <- this indent plus continuation
6678 *-> here;
6679 */
6680 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6681 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6682 {
6683 if (cont_amount > 0)
6684 amount = cont_amount;
6685 else
6686 amount += ind_continuation;
6687 break;
6688 }
6689
6690 /*
6691 * case xx: <- line up with this case
6692 * x = 333;
6693 * case yy:
6694 */
6695 if ( (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
6696 || (iscase && lookfor_break)
6697 || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
6698 {
6699 /*
6700 * Check that this case label is not for another
6701 * switch()
6702 */ /* XXX */
6703 if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
6704 NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
6705 {
6706 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
6707 break;
6708 }
6709 continue;
6710 }
6711
6712 n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum); /* XXX */
6713
6714 /*
6715 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if
6716 * y = y + 1;
6717 * -> s = 99;
6718 *
6719 * case xx:
6720 * if (cond) <- line up with this line
6721 * y = y + 1;
6722 * -> s = 99;
6723 */
6724 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6725 {
6726 if (n)
6727 amount = n;
6728
6729 if (!lookfor_break)
6730 break;
6731 }
6732
6733 /*
6734 * case xx: x = x + 1; <- line up with this x
6735 * -> y = y + 1;
6736 *
6737 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if
6738 * -> y = y + 1;
6739 */
6740 if (n)
6741 {
6742 amount = n;
6743 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6744 if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
6745 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6746 break;
6747 }
6748
6749 /*
6750 * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
6751 * label. If nothing is found, line up relative to the
6752 * switch label.
6753 * break; <- may line up with this line
6754 * case xx:
6755 * -> y = 1;
6756 */
6757 scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase /* XXX */
6758 ? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
6759 lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
6760 continue;
6761 }
6762
6763 /*
6764 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
6765 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
6766 */
6767 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
6768 {
6769 if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
6770 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6771 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6772 continue;
6773 }
6774
6775 /*
6776 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
6777 */
6778 if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
6779 {
6780 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6781 if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
6782 continue;
6783 }
6784
6785 /*
6786 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
6787 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
6788 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
6789 * unlocked it)
6790 */
6791 l = ml_get_curline();
6792 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
6793 || cin_nocode(l))
6794 continue;
6795
6796 /*
6797 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
6798 * constructor initialization?
6799 */ /* XXX */
6800 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass
6801 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
6802 {
6803 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6804 {
6805 if (cont_amount > 0)
6806 amount = cont_amount;
6807 else
6808 amount += ind_continuation;
6809 }
6810 else if (col == 0 || theline[0] == '{')
6811 {
6812 amount = get_indent();
6813 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
6814 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6815 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6816 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
6817 if (theline[0] != '{')
6818 amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
6819 }
6820 else
6821 {
6822 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6823 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
6824 amount = (int)col;
6825 }
6826 break;
6827 }
6828 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6829 {
6830 /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
6831 * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. */
6832 if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
6833 break;
6834 else
6835 continue;
6836 }
6837
6838 /*
6839 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
6840 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
6841 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg:
6842 * 123,
6843 * sizeof
6844 * here
6845 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
6846 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
6847 * (indented).
6848 */
6849 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6850
6851 if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6852 && terminated == ','))
6853 {
6854 /*
6855 * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
6856 * go back to the line that starts it so
6857 * we can get the right prevailing indent
6858 * if ( foo &&
6859 * bar )
6860 */
6861 /*
6862 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6863 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6864 */
6865 (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
6866 trypos = find_match_paren(
6867 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6868 ind_maxcomment);
6869
6870 /*
6871 * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
6872 * braces.
6873 */
6874 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6875 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6876
6877 if (trypos != NULL)
6878 {
6879 /*
6880 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is
6881 * handled above.
6882 * case xx: if ( asdf &&
6883 * asdf)
6884 */
6885 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6886 l = ml_get_curline();
6887 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6888 {
6889 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6890 continue;
6891 }
6892 }
6893
6894 /*
6895 * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
6896 * indent from
6897 * char *usethis = "bla\
6898 * bla",
6899 * here;
6900 */
6901 if (terminated == ',')
6902 {
6903 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6904 {
6905 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6906 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
6907 break;
6908 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6909 }
6910 }
6911
6912 /*
6913 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
6914 * ignoring any jump label. XXX
6915 */
6916 cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
6917 &l, ind_maxcomment);
6918
6919 /*
6920 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
6921 * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
6922 * while (not)
6923 * -> {
6924 * }
6925 */
6926 if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6927 && theline[0] == '{')
6928 {
6929 amount = cur_amount;
6930 /*
6931 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
6932 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
6933 * in the same line (scope is the same). Probably:
6934 * { 1, 2 },
6935 * -> { 3, 4 }
6936 */
6937 if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
6938 amount += ind_open_extra;
6939
6940 if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
6941 {
6942 /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
6943 * class declaration or initialization */
6944 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6945 continue;
6946 }
6947 break;
6948 }
6949
6950 /*
6951 * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
6952 * Also allow " } else".
6953 */
6954 if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
6955 {
6956 /*
6957 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
6958 * with the last one.
6959 * if (cond)
6960 * 100 +
6961 * -> here;
6962 */
6963 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6964 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6965 {
6966 if (cont_amount > 0)
6967 amount = cont_amount;
6968 else
6969 amount += ind_continuation;
6970 break;
6971 }
6972
6973 /*
6974 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
6975 * are finished.
6976 * while (not)
6977 * -> here;
6978 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
6979 * before this is terminated.
6980 * yyy;
6981 * if (stat)
6982 * while (not)
6983 * xxx;
6984 * -> here;
6985 */
6986 amount = cur_amount;
6987 if (theline[0] == '{')
6988 amount += ind_open_extra;
6989 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
6990 {
6991 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6992 break;
6993 }
6994
6995 /*
6996 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
6997 * do, line up with the while()
6998 * do
6999 * x = 1;
7000 * -> here
7001 */
7002 l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
7003 if (cin_isdo(l))
7004 {
7005 if (whilelevel == 0)
7006 break;
7007 --whilelevel;
7008 }
7009
7010 /*
7011 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
7012 * one between the "if" and the "else".
7013 * Need to use the scope of this "else". XXX
7014 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
7015 */
7016 if (cin_iselse(l)
7017 && whilelevel == 0
7018 && ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7019 == NULL
7020 || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
7021 ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL))
7022 break;
7023 }
7024
7025 /*
7026 * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
7027 * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
7028 * add someting for a continuation line, depending on
7029 * the line before this one.
7030 */
7031 else
7032 {
7033 /*
7034 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
7035 * the last one.
7036 * c = 99 +
7037 * 100 +
7038 * -> here;
7039 */
7040 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
7041 {
7042 /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
7043 if (terminated == ',')
7044 amount += ind_continuation;
7045 break;
7046 }
7047
7048 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7049 {
7050 /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
7051 * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
7052 * declaration/initialization, if it is an
7053 * opening brace or we are looking just for
7054 * enumerations/initializations. */
7055 if (terminated == ',')
7056 {
7057 if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
7058 break;
7059
7060 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
7061 continue;
7062 }
7063
7064 /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
7065 * reduce indent. */
7066 if (amount > cur_amount)
7067 amount = cur_amount;
7068 }
7069 else
7070 {
7071 /*
7072 * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
7073 * line up with this line, remember its indent
7074 * 100 +
7075 * -> here;
7076 */
7077 amount = cur_amount;
7078
7079 /*
7080 * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
7081 * are in an initialization or enum
7082 * struct xxx =
7083 * {
7084 * sizeof a,
7085 * 124 };
7086 * or a normal possible continuation line.
7087 * but only, of no other statement has been found
7088 * yet.
7089 */
7090 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
7091 {
7092 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
7093 cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7094 }
7095 else
7096 {
7097 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
7098 && *l != NUL
7099 && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7100 /* XXX */
7101 cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
7102 curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7103 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7104 lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
7105 }
7106 }
7107 }
7108 }
7109
7110 /*
7111 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
7112 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
7113 */
7114 /* XXX */
7115 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(l,
7116 curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7117 {
7118 /*
7119 * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
7120 * with the last one.
7121 * while (cond);
7122 * 100 + <- line up with this one
7123 * -> here;
7124 */
7125 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7126 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7127 {
7128 if (cont_amount > 0)
7129 amount = cont_amount;
7130 else
7131 amount += ind_continuation;
7132 break;
7133 }
7134
7135 if (whilelevel == 0)
7136 {
7137 lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
7138 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7139 if (theline[0] == '{')
7140 amount += ind_open_extra;
7141 }
7142 ++whilelevel;
7143 }
7144
7145 /*
7146 * We are after a "normal" statement.
7147 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
7148 * indent of that other statement.
7149 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
7150 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
7151 */
7152 else
7153 {
7154 /*
7155 * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
7156 * may be lined up with the case label.
7157 */
7158 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
7159 && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
7160 {
7161 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
7162 continue;
7163 }
7164
7165 /*
7166 * Handle "do {" line.
7167 */
7168 if (whilelevel > 0)
7169 {
7170 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7171 if (cin_isdo(l))
7172 {
7173 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7174 --whilelevel;
7175 continue;
7176 }
7177 }
7178
7179 /*
7180 * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
7181 * the amount for a continuation line.
7182 * x = 1;
7183 * y = foo +
7184 * -> here;
7185 * or
7186 * int x = 1;
7187 * int foo,
7188 * -> here;
7189 */
7190 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7191 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7192 {
7193 if (cont_amount > 0)
7194 amount = cont_amount;
7195 else
7196 amount += ind_continuation;
7197 break;
7198 }
7199
7200 /*
7201 * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
7202 * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
7203 * x = 1; x = 1;
7204 * if (asdf) y = 2;
7205 * while (asdf) ->here;
7206 * here;
7207 * ->foo;
7208 */
7209 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
7210 {
7211 if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
7212 break;
7213 }
7214
7215 /*
7216 * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
7217 * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
7218 * a terminated line.
7219 */
7220 else
7221 {
7222 /*
7223 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
7224 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
7225 * the line. Helps for:
7226 * func(asdr,
7227 * asdfasdf);
7228 * here;
7229 */
7230term_again:
7231 l = ml_get_curline();
7232 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7233 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7234 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7235 {
7236 /*
7237 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is
7238 * handled above.
7239 * case xx: if ( asdf &&
7240 * asdf)
7241 */
7242 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7243 l = ml_get_curline();
7244 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7245 {
7246 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7247 continue;
7248 }
7249 }
7250
7251 /* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
7252 * with a statement after it.
7253 * case 1: { <-- don't use this { position
7254 * stat;
7255 * }
7256 * case 2:
7257 * stat;
7258 * }
7259 */
7260 iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l));
7261
7262 /*
7263 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7264 * ignoring any jump label.
7265 */
7266 amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7267 &l, ind_maxcomment);
7268
7269 if (theline[0] == '{')
7270 amount += ind_open_extra;
7271 /* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
7272 if (*skipwhite(l) == '{')
7273 amount -= ind_open_extra;
7274 lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;
7275
7276 /*
7277 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
7278 * that block.
7279 */
7280 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7281 if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}'
7282 && (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7283 != NULL) /* XXX */
7284 {
7285 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7286 /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
7287 /* but skip block for "} else {" */
7288 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7289 if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
7290 goto term_again;
7291 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7292 }
7293 }
7294 }
7295 }
7296 }
7297 }
7298
7299 /* add extra indent for a comment */
7300 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7301 amount += ind_comment;
7302 }
7303
7304 /*
7305 * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
7306 *
7307 * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
7308 * basically just match where the previous line is, except
7309 * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
7310 * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
7311 */
7312 else
7313 {
7314 /*
7315 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
7316 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
7317 * of a function
7318 */
7319
7320 if (theline[0] == '{')
7321 {
7322 amount = ind_first_open;
7323 }
7324
7325 /*
7326 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
7327 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
7328 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment
7329 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'.
7330 */
7331 else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
7332 && !cin_nocode(theline)
7333 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
7334 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7335 && cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1)
7336 && !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
7337 {
7338 amount = ind_func_type;
7339 }
7340 else
7341 {
7342 amount = 0;
7343 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7344
7345 /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */
7346
7347 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7348 {
7349 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7350 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7351
7352 l = ml_get_curline();
7353
7354 /*
7355 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7356 */ /* XXX */
7357 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7358 {
7359 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7360 continue;
7361 }
7362
7363 /*
7364 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or constructor
7365 * initialization?
7366 */ /* XXX */
7367 if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{'
7368 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
7369 {
7370 if (col == 0)
7371 {
7372 amount = get_indent() + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */
7373 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7374 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7375 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7376 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum)
7377 + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */
7378 }
7379 else
7380 {
7381 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
7382 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
7383 amount = (int)col;
7384 }
7385 break;
7386 }
7387
7388 /*
7389 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7390 */
7391 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7392 continue;
7393
7394 if (cin_nocode(l))
7395 continue;
7396
7397 /*
7398 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
7399 * indentation:
7400 * int foo,
7401 * bar;
7402 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
7403 * enum foobar
7404 * {
7405 * ...
7406 * } foo,
7407 * bar;
7408 */
7409 n = 0;
7410 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7411 || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
7412 {
7413 /* take us back to opening paren */
7414 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7415 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7416 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7417 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7418
7419 /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
7420 * back to the first line with a backslash:
7421 * char *foo = "bla\
7422 * bla",
7423 * here;
7424 */
7425 while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7426 {
7427 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7428 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7429 break;
7430 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7431 }
7432
7433 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7434
7435 if (amount == 0)
7436 amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7437 if (amount == 0)
7438 amount = ind_continuation;
7439 break;
7440 }
7441
7442 /*
7443 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
7444 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
7445 */
7446 if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum)) /* XXX */
7447 break;
7448 l = ml_get_curline();
7449
7450 /*
7451 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function. Put
7452 * current line at the left margin. For when 'cino' has "fs".
7453 */
7454 if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
7455 break;
7456
7457 /* (matching {)
7458 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
7459 * comments) align at column 0. For example:
7460 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
7461 * / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
7462 */
7463 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
7464 break;
7465
7466 /*
7467 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
7468 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
7469 * parameters.
7470 */
7471 if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7472 {
7473 amount = ind_param;
7474 break;
7475 }
7476
7477 /*
7478 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
7479 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
7480 * int foo,
7481 * bar;
7482 * indent_to_0 here;
7483 */
7484 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u*)";", NULL))
7485 {
7486 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7487 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7488 || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
7489 break;
7490 l = ml_get_curline();
7491 }
7492
7493 /*
7494 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
7495 * use the indent of this line.
7496 *
7497 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7498 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7499 */
7500 find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7501
7502 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7503 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7504 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7505 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7506 break;
7507 }
7508
7509 /* add extra indent for a comment */
7510 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7511 amount += ind_comment;
7512
7513 /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
7514 * "asdfasdf\
7515 * here";
7516 * char *foo = "asdf\
7517 * here";
7518 */
7519 if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
7520 {
7521 l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7522 if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7523 {
7524 cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7525 if (cur_amount > 0)
7526 amount = cur_amount;
7527 else if (cur_amount == 0)
7528 amount += ind_continuation;
7529 }
7530 }
7531 }
7532 }
7533
7534theend:
7535 /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
7536 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7537
7538 vim_free(linecopy);
7539
7540 if (amount < 0)
7541 return 0;
7542 return amount;
7543}
7544
7545 static int
7546find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
7547 int lookfor;
7548 linenr_T ourscope;
7549 int ind_maxparen;
7550 int ind_maxcomment;
7551{
7552 char_u *look;
7553 pos_T *theirscope;
7554 char_u *mightbeif;
7555 int elselevel;
7556 int whilelevel;
7557
7558 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7559 {
7560 elselevel = 1;
7561 whilelevel = 0;
7562 }
7563 else
7564 {
7565 elselevel = 0;
7566 whilelevel = 1;
7567 }
7568
7569 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7570
7571 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
7572 {
7573 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7574 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7575
7576 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7577 if (cin_iselse(look)
7578 || cin_isif(look)
7579 || cin_isdo(look) /* XXX */
7580 || cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7581 {
7582 /*
7583 * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
7584 * we must be out of scope...
7585 */
7586 theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); /* XXX */
7587 if (theirscope == NULL)
7588 break;
7589
7590 /*
7591 * and if the brace enclosing this is further
7592 * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
7593 * out of luck too.
7594 */
7595 if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
7596 break;
7597
7598 /*
7599 * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
7600 * then we can ignore it because it's in a
7601 * different scope...
7602 */
7603 if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
7604 continue;
7605
7606 /*
7607 * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
7608 * then we need to go back to another if, so
7609 * increment elselevel
7610 */
7611 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7612 if (cin_iselse(look))
7613 {
7614 mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
7615 if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
7616 ++elselevel;
7617 continue;
7618 }
7619
7620 /*
7621 * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
7622 * another "do", so increment whilelevel. XXX
7623 */
7624 if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7625 {
7626 ++whilelevel;
7627 continue;
7628 }
7629
7630 /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
7631 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7632 if (cin_isif(look))
7633 {
7634 elselevel--;
7635 /*
7636 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
7637 * get in the way.
7638 */
7639 if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7640 whilelevel = 0;
7641 }
7642
7643 /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
7644 if (cin_isdo(look))
7645 whilelevel--;
7646
7647 /*
7648 * if we've used up all the elses, then
7649 * this must be the if that we want!
7650 * match the indent level of that if.
7651 */
7652 if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
7653 {
7654 return OK;
7655 }
7656 }
7657 }
7658 return FAIL;
7659}
7660
7661# if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
7662/*
7663 * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
7664 */
7665 int
7666get_expr_indent()
7667{
7668 int indent;
7669 pos_T pos;
7670 int save_State;
7671
7672 pos = curwin->w_cursor;
7673 set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7674 ++sandbox;
7675 indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
7676 --sandbox;
7677
7678 /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
7679 * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
7680 * command. */
7681 save_State = State;
7682 State = INSERT;
7683 curwin->w_cursor = pos;
7684 check_cursor();
7685 State = save_State;
7686
7687 /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
7688 if (indent < 0)
7689 indent = get_indent();
7690
7691 return indent;
7692}
7693# endif
7694
7695#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */
7696
7697#if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)
7698
7699static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));
7700
7701 static int
7702lisp_match(p)
7703 char_u *p;
7704{
7705 char_u buf[LSIZE];
7706 int len;
7707 char_u *word = p_lispwords;
7708
7709 while (*word != NUL)
7710 {
7711 (void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
7712 len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
7713 if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
7714 return TRUE;
7715 }
7716 return FALSE;
7717}
7718
7719/*
7720 * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
7721 * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
7722 * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
7723 * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, dirk@rave.org
7724 *
7725 * TODO:
7726 * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
7727 * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
7728 * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
7729 * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
7730 * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
7731 * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007732 * Update from Sergey Khorev:
7733 * I tried to fix the first two issues.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007734 */
7735 int
7736get_lisp_indent()
7737{
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007738 pos_T *pos, realpos, paren;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007739 int amount;
7740 char_u *that;
7741 colnr_T col;
7742 colnr_T firsttry;
7743 int parencount, quotecount;
7744 int vi_lisp;
7745
7746 /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
7747 vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);
7748
7749 realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
7750 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7751
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007752 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
7753 pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7754 else
7755 {
7756 paren = *pos;
7757 pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7758 if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
7759 pos = &paren;
7760 }
7761 if (pos != NULL)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007762 {
7763 /* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
7764 * line that is at the same () level. */
7765 amount = -1;
7766 parencount = 0;
7767
7768 while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
7769 {
7770 if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7771 continue;
7772 for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
7773 {
7774 if (*that == ';')
7775 {
7776 while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7777 ++that;
7778 continue;
7779 }
7780 if (*that == '\\')
7781 {
7782 if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7783 ++that;
7784 continue;
7785 }
7786 if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
7787 {
7788 that++;
7789 while (*that && (*that != '"' || *(that - 1) == '\\'))
7790 ++that;
7791 }
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007792 if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007793 ++parencount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007794 else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007795 --parencount;
7796 }
7797 if (parencount == 0)
7798 {
7799 amount = get_indent();
7800 break;
7801 }
7802 }
7803
7804 if (amount == -1)
7805 {
7806 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
7807 curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
7808 col = pos->col;
7809
7810 that = ml_get_curline();
7811
7812 if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
7813 amount = 2;
7814 else
7815 {
7816 amount = 0;
7817 while (*that && col)
7818 {
7819 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
7820 col--;
7821 }
7822
7823 /*
7824 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
7825 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
7826 *
7827 * (let ((a 1)) instead (let ((a 1))
7828 * (...)) of (...))
7829 */
7830
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007831 if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7832 && lisp_match(that + 1))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007833 amount += 2;
7834 else
7835 {
7836 that++;
7837 amount++;
7838 firsttry = amount;
7839
7840 while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7841 {
7842 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7843 ++that;
7844 }
7845
7846 if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
7847 {
7848 /* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do
7849 * argument if it is more than one line */
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007850 if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007851 firsttry++;
7852
7853 parencount = 0;
7854 quotecount = 0;
7855
7856 if (vi_lisp
7857 || (*that != '"'
7858 && *that != '\''
7859 && *that != '#'
7860 && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
7861 {
7862 while (*that
7863 && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
7864 || quotecount
7865 || parencount)
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007866 && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007867 && !quotecount
7868 && !parencount
7869 && vi_lisp)))
7870 {
7871 if (*that == '"')
7872 quotecount = !quotecount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007873 if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7874 && !quotecount)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007875 ++parencount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007876 if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7877 && !quotecount)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007878 --parencount;
7879 if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
7880 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7881 (colnr_T)amount);
7882 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7883 (colnr_T)amount);
7884 }
7885 }
7886 while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7887 {
7888 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7889 that++;
7890 }
7891 if (!*that || *that == ';')
7892 amount = firsttry;
7893 }
7894 }
7895 }
7896 }
7897 }
7898 else
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007899 amount = 0; /* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007900
7901 curwin->w_cursor = realpos;
7902
7903 return amount;
7904}
7905#endif /* FEAT_LISP */
7906
7907 void
7908prepare_to_exit()
7909{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00007910#if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN)
7911 /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which
7912 * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance
7913 * problems. */
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00007914 signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN);
7915#endif
7916
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007917#ifdef FEAT_GUI
7918 if (gui.in_use)
7919 {
7920 gui.dying = TRUE;
7921 out_trash(); /* trash any pending output */
7922 }
7923 else
7924#endif
7925 {
7926 windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);
7927
7928 /*
7929 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
7930 * screen (if there are two screens).
7931 */
7932 settmode(TMODE_COOK);
7933#ifdef WIN3264
7934 if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
7935#endif
7936 stoptermcap();
7937 out_flush();
7938 }
7939}
7940
7941/*
7942 * Preserve files and exit.
7943 * When called IObuff must contain a message.
7944 */
7945 void
7946preserve_exit()
7947{
7948 buf_T *buf;
7949
7950 prepare_to_exit();
7951
7952 out_str(IObuff);
7953 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */
7954 out_flush();
7955
7956 ml_close_notmod(); /* close all not-modified buffers */
7957
7958 for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
7959 {
7960 if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
7961 {
7962 OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
7963 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */
7964 out_flush();
7965 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
7966 break;
7967 }
7968 }
7969
7970 ml_close_all(FALSE); /* close all memfiles, without deleting */
7971
7972 OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));
7973
7974 getout(1);
7975}
7976
7977/*
7978 * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
7979 */
7980 int
7981vim_fexists(fname)
7982 char_u *fname;
7983{
7984 struct stat st;
7985
7986 if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
7987 return FALSE;
7988 return TRUE;
7989}
7990
7991/*
7992 * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
7993 * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
7994 * each line in the file. Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
7995 * time, because it can be a system call.
7996 */
7997
7998#ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
7999# ifdef FEAT_GUI /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
8000# define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
8001# else
8002# define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
8003# endif
8004#endif
8005
8006static int breakcheck_count = 0;
8007
8008 void
8009line_breakcheck()
8010{
8011 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
8012 {
8013 breakcheck_count = 0;
8014 ui_breakcheck();
8015 }
8016}
8017
8018/*
8019 * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
8020 */
8021 void
8022fast_breakcheck()
8023{
8024 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
8025 {
8026 breakcheck_count = 0;
8027 ui_breakcheck();
8028 }
8029}
8030
8031/*
8032 * Expand wildcards. Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
8033 * 'wildignore'.
8034 */
8035 int
8036expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8037 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */
8038 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */
8039 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */
8040 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */
8041 int flags; /* EW_DIR, etc. */
8042{
8043 int retval;
8044 int i, j;
8045 char_u *p;
8046 int non_suf_match; /* number without matching suffix */
8047
8048 retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8049
8050 /* When keeping all matches, return here */
8051 if (flags & EW_KEEPALL)
8052 return retval;
8053
8054#ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
8055 /*
8056 * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
8057 */
8058 if (*p_wig)
8059 {
8060 char_u *ffname;
8061
8062 /* check all files in (*file)[] */
8063 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8064 {
8065 ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
8066 if (ffname == NULL) /* out of memory */
8067 break;
8068# ifdef VMS
8069 vms_remove_version(ffname);
8070# endif
8071 if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
8072 {
8073 /* remove this matching file from the list */
8074 vim_free((*file)[i]);
8075 for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
8076 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
8077 --*num_file;
8078 --i;
8079 }
8080 vim_free(ffname);
8081 }
8082 }
8083#endif
8084
8085 /*
8086 * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
8087 */
8088 if (*num_file > 1)
8089 {
8090 non_suf_match = 0;
8091 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8092 {
8093 if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
8094 {
8095 /*
8096 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
8097 * of the list.
8098 */
8099 p = (*file)[i];
8100 for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
8101 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
8102 (*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
8103 }
8104 }
8105 }
8106
8107 return retval;
8108}
8109
8110/*
8111 * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
8112 */
8113 int
8114match_suffix(fname)
8115 char_u *fname;
8116{
8117 int fnamelen, setsuflen;
8118 char_u *setsuf;
8119#define MAXSUFLEN 30 /* maximum length of a file suffix */
8120 char_u suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];
8121
8122 fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
8123 setsuflen = 0;
8124 for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
8125 {
8126 setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
8127 if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
8128 && fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
8129 (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
8130 break;
8131 setsuflen = 0;
8132 }
8133 return (setsuflen != 0);
8134}
8135
8136#if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)
8137
8138# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8139static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
8140static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
8141# endif
8142
8143# if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
8144/*
8145 * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32. It's here because
8146 * it's shared between these systems.
8147 */
8148# if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
8149# define _cdecl /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
8150# else
8151# ifdef __BORLANDC__
8152# define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
8153# endif
8154# endif
8155
8156/*
8157 * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
8158 */
8159 static int _cdecl
8160pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
8161{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00008162 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008163}
8164
8165# ifndef WIN3264
8166 static void
8167namelowcpy(
8168 char_u *d,
8169 char_u *s)
8170{
8171# ifdef DJGPP
8172 if (USE_LONG_FNAME) /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
8173 while (*s)
8174 *d++ = *s++;
8175 else
8176# endif
8177 while (*s)
8178 *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
8179 *d = NUL;
8180}
8181# endif
8182
8183/*
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008184 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or
8185 * directories. Adds matches to "gap". Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008186 * Return the number of matches found.
8187 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8188 * at "path[wildoff]".
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008189 * Return the number of matches found.
8190 * NOTE: much of this is identical to unix_expandpath(), keep in sync!
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008191 */
8192 static int
8193dos_expandpath(
8194 garray_T *gap,
8195 char_u *path,
8196 int wildoff,
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008197 int flags, /* EW_* flags */
8198 int didstar) /* expaneded "**" once already */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008199{
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008200 char_u *buf;
8201 char_u *path_end;
8202 char_u *p, *s, *e;
8203 int start_len = gap->ga_len;
8204 char_u *pat;
8205 regmatch_T regmatch;
8206 int starts_with_dot;
8207 int matches;
8208 int len;
8209 int starstar = FALSE;
8210 static int stardepth = 0; /* depth for "**" expansion */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008211#ifdef WIN3264
8212 WIN32_FIND_DATA fb;
8213 HANDLE hFind = (HANDLE)0;
8214# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8215 WIN32_FIND_DATAW wfb;
8216 WCHAR *wn = NULL; /* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
8217# endif
8218#else
8219 struct ffblk fb;
8220#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008221 char_u *matchname;
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008222 int ok;
8223
8224 /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */
8225 if (stardepth > 0)
8226 {
8227 ui_breakcheck();
8228 if (got_int)
8229 return 0;
8230 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008231
8232 /* make room for file name */
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008233 buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008234 if (buf == NULL)
8235 return 0;
8236
8237 /*
8238 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
8239 * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
8240 */
8241 p = buf;
8242 s = buf;
8243 e = NULL;
8244 path_end = path;
8245 while (*path_end != NUL)
8246 {
8247 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8248 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8249 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8250 *p++ = *path_end++;
8251 else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
8252 {
8253 if (e != NULL)
8254 break;
8255 s = p + 1;
8256 }
8257 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8258 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
8259 e = p;
8260#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8261 if (has_mbyte)
8262 {
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00008263 len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008264 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8265 p += len;
8266 path_end += len;
8267 }
8268 else
8269#endif
8270 *p++ = *path_end++;
8271 }
8272 e = p;
8273 *e = NUL;
8274
8275 /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
8276 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8277 * component. */
8278 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8279 if (rem_backslash(p))
8280 {
8281 STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8282 --e;
8283 --s;
8284 }
8285
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008286 /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */
8287 for (p = s; p < e; ++p)
8288 if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*')
8289 starstar = TRUE;
8290
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008291 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8292 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8293 if (pat == NULL)
8294 {
8295 vim_free(buf);
8296 return 0;
8297 }
8298
8299 /* compile the regexp into a program */
8300 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Always ignore case */
8301 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8302 vim_free(pat);
8303
8304 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8305 {
8306 vim_free(buf);
8307 return 0;
8308 }
8309
8310 /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
8311 matchname = vim_strsave(s);
8312
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008313 /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more
8314 * is following then find matches without any directory. */
8315 if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2
8316 && *path_end == '/')
8317 {
8318 STRCPY(s, path_end + 1);
8319 ++stardepth;
8320 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE);
8321 --stardepth;
8322 }
8323
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008324 /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
8325 STRCPY(s, "*.*");
8326#ifdef WIN3264
8327# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8328 if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
8329 {
8330 /* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'. Attempt using the
8331 * wide function. If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
8332 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
8333 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8334 if (wn != NULL)
8335 {
8336 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8337 if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
8338 && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
8339 {
8340 vim_free(wn);
8341 wn = NULL;
8342 }
8343 }
8344 }
8345
8346 if (wn == NULL)
8347# endif
8348 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8349 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8350#else
8351 /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
8352 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8353 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8354#endif
8355
8356 while (ok)
8357 {
8358#ifdef WIN3264
8359# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8360 if (wn != NULL)
8361 p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL); /* p is allocated here */
8362 else
8363# endif
8364 p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
8365#else
8366 p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
8367#endif
8368 /* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for. Accept
8369 * all entries found with "matchname". */
8370 if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8371 && (matchname == NULL
8372 || vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0)))
8373 {
8374#ifdef WIN3264
8375 STRCPY(s, p);
8376#else
8377 namelowcpy(s, p);
8378#endif
8379 len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008380
8381 if (starstar && stardepth < 100)
8382 {
8383 /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to
8384 * find matches. */
8385 STRCPY(buf + len, "/**");
8386 STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end);
8387 ++stardepth;
8388 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE);
8389 --stardepth;
8390 }
8391
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008392 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8393 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
8394 {
8395 /* need to expand another component of the path */
8396 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008397 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008398 }
8399 else
8400 {
8401 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8402 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8403 if (*path_end != 0)
8404 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8405 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */
8406 addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8407 }
8408 }
8409
8410#ifdef WIN3264
8411# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8412 if (wn != NULL)
8413 {
8414 vim_free(p);
8415 ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
8416 }
8417 else
8418# endif
8419 ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
8420#else
8421 ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
8422#endif
8423
8424 /* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
8425 * itself. Finds the long name of a short filename. */
8426 if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
8427 {
8428 STRCPY(s, matchname);
8429#ifdef WIN3264
8430 FindClose(hFind);
8431# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8432 if (wn != NULL)
8433 {
8434 vim_free(wn);
8435 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8436 if (wn != NULL)
8437 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8438 }
8439 if (wn == NULL)
8440# endif
8441 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8442 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8443#else
8444 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8445 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8446#endif
8447 vim_free(matchname);
8448 matchname = NULL;
8449 }
8450 }
8451
8452#ifdef WIN3264
8453 FindClose(hFind);
8454# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8455 vim_free(wn);
8456# endif
8457#endif
8458 vim_free(buf);
8459 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8460 vim_free(matchname);
8461
8462 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8463 if (matches > 0)
8464 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
8465 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8466 return matches;
8467}
8468
8469 int
8470mch_expandpath(
8471 garray_T *gap,
8472 char_u *path,
8473 int flags) /* EW_* flags */
8474{
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008475 return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags, FALSE);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008476}
8477# endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */
8478
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008479#if (defined(UNIX) && !defined(VMS)) || defined(USE_UNIXFILENAME) \
8480 || defined(PROTO)
8481/*
8482 * Unix style wildcard expansion code.
8483 * It's here because it's used both for Unix and Mac.
8484 */
8485static int pstrcmp __ARGS((const void *, const void *));
8486
8487 static int
8488pstrcmp(a, b)
8489 const void *a, *b;
8490{
8491 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
8492}
8493
8494/*
8495 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or
8496 * directories. Adds matches to "gap". Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc.
8497 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8498 * at "path + wildoff".
8499 * Return the number of matches found.
8500 * NOTE: much of this is identical to dos_expandpath(), keep in sync!
8501 */
8502 int
8503unix_expandpath(gap, path, wildoff, flags, didstar)
8504 garray_T *gap;
8505 char_u *path;
8506 int wildoff;
8507 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8508 int didstar; /* expanded "**" once already */
8509{
8510 char_u *buf;
8511 char_u *path_end;
8512 char_u *p, *s, *e;
8513 int start_len = gap->ga_len;
8514 char_u *pat;
8515 regmatch_T regmatch;
8516 int starts_with_dot;
8517 int matches;
8518 int len;
8519 int starstar = FALSE;
8520 static int stardepth = 0; /* depth for "**" expansion */
8521
8522 DIR *dirp;
8523 struct dirent *dp;
8524
8525 /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */
8526 if (stardepth > 0)
8527 {
8528 ui_breakcheck();
8529 if (got_int)
8530 return 0;
8531 }
8532
8533 /* make room for file name */
8534 buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
8535 if (buf == NULL)
8536 return 0;
8537
8538 /*
8539 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard.
8540 * Copy it into "buf", including the preceding characters.
8541 */
8542 p = buf;
8543 s = buf;
8544 e = NULL;
8545 path_end = path;
8546 while (*path_end != NUL)
8547 {
8548 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8549 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8550 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8551 *p++ = *path_end++;
8552 else if (*path_end == '/')
8553 {
8554 if (e != NULL)
8555 break;
8556 s = p + 1;
8557 }
8558 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8559 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[{~$", *path_end) != NULL)
8560 e = p;
8561#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8562 if (has_mbyte)
8563 {
Bram Moolenaar0fa313a2005-08-10 21:07:57 +00008564 len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end);
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008565 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8566 p += len;
8567 path_end += len;
8568 }
8569 else
8570#endif
8571 *p++ = *path_end++;
8572 }
8573 e = p;
8574 *e = NUL;
8575
8576 /* now we have one wildcard component between "s" and "e" */
8577 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8578 * component. */
8579 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8580 if (rem_backslash(p))
8581 {
8582 STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8583 --e;
8584 --s;
8585 }
8586
8587 /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */
8588 for (p = s; p < e; ++p)
8589 if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*')
8590 starstar = TRUE;
8591
8592 /* convert the file pattern to a regexp pattern */
8593 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8594 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8595 if (pat == NULL)
8596 {
8597 vim_free(buf);
8598 return 0;
8599 }
8600
8601 /* compile the regexp into a program */
Bram Moolenaarcc016f52005-12-10 20:23:46 +00008602#ifdef CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME
Bram Moolenaar231334e2005-07-25 20:46:57 +00008603 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Behave like Terminal.app */
8604#else
8605 regmatch.rm_ic = FALSE; /* Don't ever ignore case */
8606#endif
8607 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8608 vim_free(pat);
8609
8610 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8611 {
8612 vim_free(buf);
8613 return 0;
8614 }
8615
8616 /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more
8617 * is following then find matches without any directory. */
8618 if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2
8619 && *path_end == '/')
8620 {
8621 STRCPY(s, path_end + 1);
8622 ++stardepth;
8623 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE);
8624 --stardepth;
8625 }
8626
8627 /* open the directory for scanning */
8628 *s = NUL;
8629 dirp = opendir(*buf == NUL ? "." : (char *)buf);
8630
8631 /* Find all matching entries */
8632 if (dirp != NULL)
8633 {
8634 for (;;)
8635 {
8636 dp = readdir(dirp);
8637 if (dp == NULL)
8638 break;
8639 if ((dp->d_name[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8640 && vim_regexec(&regmatch, (char_u *)dp->d_name, (colnr_T)0))
8641 {
8642 STRCPY(s, dp->d_name);
8643 len = STRLEN(buf);
8644
8645 if (starstar && stardepth < 100)
8646 {
8647 /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to
8648 * find matches. */
8649 STRCPY(buf + len, "/**");
8650 STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end);
8651 ++stardepth;
8652 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE);
8653 --stardepth;
8654 }
8655
8656 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8657 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) /* handle more wildcards */
8658 {
8659 /* need to expand another component of the path */
8660 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8661 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE);
8662 }
8663 else
8664 {
8665 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8666 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8667 if (*path_end != NUL)
8668 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8669 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */
8670 {
8671#if defined(MACOS_X) && defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
8672 size_t precomp_len = STRLEN(buf)+1;
8673 char_u *precomp_buf =
8674 mac_precompose_path(buf, precomp_len, &precomp_len);
8675 if (precomp_buf)
8676 {
8677 mch_memmove(buf, precomp_buf, precomp_len);
8678 vim_free(precomp_buf);
8679 }
8680#endif
8681 addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8682 }
8683 }
8684 }
8685 }
8686
8687 closedir(dirp);
8688 }
8689
8690 vim_free(buf);
8691 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8692
8693 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8694 if (matches > 0)
8695 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, matches,
8696 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8697 return matches;
8698}
8699#endif
8700
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008701/*
8702 * Generic wildcard expansion code.
8703 *
8704 * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
8705 * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
8706 *
8707 * Return FAIL when no single file was found. In this case "num_file" is not
8708 * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
8709 * Return OK when some files found. "num_file" is set to the number of
8710 * matches, "file" to the array of matches. Call FreeWild() later.
8711 */
8712 int
8713gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8714 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */
8715 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */
8716 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */
8717 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */
8718 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8719{
8720 int i;
8721 garray_T ga;
8722 char_u *p;
8723 static int recursive = FALSE;
8724 int add_pat;
8725
8726 /*
8727 * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user". If this fails,
8728 * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here. In this case, always
8729 * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible. Otherwise,
8730 * return FAIL.
8731 */
8732 if (recursive)
8733#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8734 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8735#else
8736 return FAIL;
8737#endif
8738
8739#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8740 /*
8741 * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
8742 * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion. This
8743 * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
8744 * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
8745 */
8746 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
8747 {
8748 if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
8749# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8750 && !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
8751# endif
8752 )
8753 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8754 }
8755#endif
8756
8757 recursive = TRUE;
8758
8759 /*
8760 * The matching file names are stored in a growarray. Init it empty.
8761 */
8762 ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);
8763
8764 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
8765 {
8766 add_pat = -1;
8767 p = pat[i];
8768
8769#ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8770 if (vim_backtick(p))
8771 add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
8772 else
8773#endif
8774 {
8775 /*
8776 * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
8777 */
8778 if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8779 {
8780 p = expand_env_save(p);
8781 if (p == NULL)
8782 p = pat[i];
8783#ifdef UNIX
8784 /*
8785 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
8786 * variable, use the shell to do that. Discard previously
8787 * found file names and start all over again.
8788 */
8789 else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8790 {
8791 vim_free(p);
8792 ga_clear(&ga);
8793 i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
8794 flags);
8795 recursive = FALSE;
8796 return i;
8797 }
8798#endif
8799 }
8800
8801 /*
8802 * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
8803 * the list. If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
8804 * the pattern.
8805 * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
8806 * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
8807 */
8808 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
8809 add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
8810 }
8811
8812 if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
8813 {
8814 char_u *t = backslash_halve_save(p);
8815
8816#if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
8817 slash_to_colon(t);
8818#endif
8819 /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs. Makes
8820 * "vim c:/" work. */
8821 if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
8822 addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
8823 else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
8824 addfile(&ga, t, flags);
8825 vim_free(t);
8826 }
8827
8828 if (p != pat[i])
8829 vim_free(p);
8830 }
8831
8832 *num_file = ga.ga_len;
8833 *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";
8834
8835 recursive = FALSE;
8836
8837 return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
8838}
8839
8840# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8841
8842/*
8843 * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
8844 */
8845 static int
8846vim_backtick(p)
8847 char_u *p;
8848{
8849 return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
8850}
8851
8852/*
8853 * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
8854 * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
8855 * Returns number of file names found.
8856 */
8857 static int
8858expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
8859 garray_T *gap;
8860 char_u *pat;
8861 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8862{
8863 char_u *p;
8864 char_u *cmd;
8865 char_u *buffer;
8866 int cnt = 0;
8867 int i;
8868
8869 /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
8870 cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
8871 if (cmd == NULL)
8872 return 0;
8873
8874#ifdef FEAT_EVAL
8875 if (*cmd == '=') /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
8876 buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p);
8877 else
8878#endif
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008879 buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL,
8880 (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008881 vim_free(cmd);
8882 if (buffer == NULL)
8883 return 0;
8884
8885 cmd = buffer;
8886 while (*cmd != NUL)
8887 {
8888 cmd = skipwhite(cmd); /* skip over white space */
8889 p = cmd;
8890 while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
8891 ++p;
8892 /* add an entry if it is not empty */
8893 if (p > cmd)
8894 {
8895 i = *p;
8896 *p = NUL;
8897 addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
8898 *p = i;
8899 ++cnt;
8900 }
8901 cmd = p;
8902 while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
8903 ++cmd;
8904 }
8905
8906 vim_free(buffer);
8907 return cnt;
8908}
8909# endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */
8910
8911/*
8912 * Add a file to a file list. Accepted flags:
8913 * EW_DIR add directories
8914 * EW_FILE add files
8915 * EW_NOTFOUND add even when it doesn't exist
8916 * EW_ADDSLASH add slash after directory name
8917 */
8918 void
8919addfile(gap, f, flags)
8920 garray_T *gap;
8921 char_u *f; /* filename */
8922 int flags;
8923{
8924 char_u *p;
8925 int isdir;
8926
8927 /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
8928 if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
8929 return;
8930
8931#ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
8932 /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
8933 if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
8934 return;
8935#endif
8936
8937 isdir = mch_isdir(f);
8938 if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
8939 return;
8940
8941 /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
8942 if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
8943 return;
8944
8945 p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
8946 if (p == NULL)
8947 return;
8948
8949 STRCPY(p, f);
8950#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
8951 slash_adjust(p);
8952#endif
8953 /*
8954 * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
8955 */
8956#ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
8957 if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
8958 add_pathsep(p);
8959#endif
8960 ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008961}
8962#endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */
8963
8964#if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
8965
8966#ifndef SEEK_SET
8967# define SEEK_SET 0
8968#endif
8969#ifndef SEEK_END
8970# define SEEK_END 2
8971#endif
8972
8973/*
8974 * Get the stdout of an external command.
8975 * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
8976 */
8977 char_u *
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008978get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008979 char_u *cmd;
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008980 char_u *infile; /* optional input file name */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008981 int flags; /* can be SHELL_SILENT */
8982{
8983 char_u *tempname;
8984 char_u *command;
8985 char_u *buffer = NULL;
8986 int len;
8987 int i = 0;
8988 FILE *fd;
8989
8990 if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
8991 return NULL;
8992
8993 /* get a name for the temp file */
8994 if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
8995 {
8996 EMSG(_(e_notmp));
8997 return NULL;
8998 }
8999
9000 /* Add the redirection stuff */
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00009001 command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00009002 if (command == NULL)
9003 goto done;
9004
9005 /*
9006 * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
9007 * Don't check timestamps here.
9008 */
9009 ++no_check_timestamps;
9010 call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
9011 --no_check_timestamps;
9012
9013 vim_free(command);
9014
9015 /*
9016 * read the names from the file into memory
9017 */
9018# ifdef VMS
9019 /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */
9020 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
9021# else
9022 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
9023# endif
9024
9025 if (fd == NULL)
9026 {
9027 EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
9028 goto done;
9029 }
9030
9031 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
9032 len = ftell(fd); /* get size of temp file */
9033 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);
9034
9035 buffer = alloc(len + 1);
9036 if (buffer != NULL)
9037 i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
9038 fclose(fd);
9039 mch_remove(tempname);
9040 if (buffer == NULL)
9041 goto done;
9042#ifdef VMS
9043 len = i; /* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
9044#endif
9045 if (i != len)
9046 {
9047 EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
9048 vim_free(buffer);
9049 buffer = NULL;
9050 }
9051 else
9052 buffer[len] = '\0'; /* make sure the buffer is terminated */
9053
9054done:
9055 vim_free(tempname);
9056 return buffer;
9057}
9058#endif
9059
9060/*
9061 * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
9062 * functions.
9063 */
9064 void
9065FreeWild(count, files)
9066 int count;
9067 char_u **files;
9068{
9069 if (files == NULL || count <= 0)
9070 return;
9071#if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
9072 /*
9073 * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
9074 * been used???
9075 */
9076 _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
9077#else
9078 while (count--)
9079 vim_free(files[count]);
9080 vim_free(files);
9081#endif
9082}
9083
9084/*
9085 * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
9086 * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
9087 * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
9088 */
9089 int
9090goto_im()
9091{
9092 return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
9093}